read.pudn.comread.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/903321/m33_at... · m7-21-0010-107 - 4 - version: 1.0.7...

Copyright ©2008 Qisda Corporation. Confidential Property

AT Command Set User Guide

M33 GSM / GPRS Wireless Module

AT Command Set User Guide Rev. 1.0.7

2008/11/13

Document ID: M7-21-0010-107

Copyright © 2008 Qisda Corporation. All rights reserved.

This document contains proprietary technical information which is the property of Qisda

Corporation and is issued in strict confidential and shall not be disclosed to others parties in

whole or in parts without written permission of Qisda Corporation.

The documents contain information on a product, which is under development and is issued

for customer evaluation purposes only.

Qisda may make changes to product specifications at any time, without notice.

Module Business Division Mobile Communications BU Qisda Corporation 18 Jihu Road, Nei-Hu, Taipei 114, Taiwan

Tel: +886-2-2799-8800

Fax: +886-2-2656-6398

http://Qisda.com

M7-21-0010-107 - 2 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


Date Originator Reviewer

01-SEP-2008 Ken CF Huang 26-SEP-2008 Bruce Wang 28-SEP-2008 Bruce Wang 03-OCT-2008 Joey Ni 15-OCT-2008 Bruce Wang 5-NOV-2008 Bruce Wang 13-NOV-2008 Bruce Wang

History Version Date Note

VER: 1.0.0 25-AUG-2008 First release VER: 1.0.1 01-SEP-2008 Modify “M2M command”: Add

multi-session function Add %CREG and %CGREG Add $SRN Modify “error report command” Modify +CPBF Modify +CCFC Fix bugs

VER: 1.0.2 26-SEP-2008 Remove $SRN, $VCD, +CTZU, +CRSL VER: 1.0.3 28-SEP-2008 Modify audio related commands VER: 1.0.4 03-OCT-2008 Modify “M2M command”:

Add $NWSO Add $NWDW Modify $NWTX

Modify “+CME ERROR” VER: 1.0.5 15-OCT-2008 Modify audio related commands VER: 1.0.6 5-NOV-2008 Remove +GDT? VER: 1.0.7 13-NOV-2008 Modify AT$F command

M7-21-0010-107 - 3 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


NOTE

There are some “T.xx” (eg: 8.4.3/T.30) mentioned in this document. For more information, please refer to “http://www.itu.int/rec/T-REC-T/e”.

M7-21-0010-107 - 4 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


Contents

1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................11

1.1 INTRODUCTION TO INTERFACE BETWEEN TE AND MS .........................................................................11 1.1.1 Explanation ....................................................................................................................................11 1.1.2 Getting started................................................................................................................................11 1.1.3 Syntax description ..........................................................................................................................11 1.1.4 AT command syntax....................................................................................................................... 12 1.1.5 AT response syntax ........................................................................................................................ 13

1.2 DOCUMENT CONVENTIONS ................................................................................................................. 14 1.2.1 Parameter type .............................................................................................................................. 14 1.2.2 Default value ................................................................................................................................. 14

2 GENERAL COMMANDS ........................................................................................................................ 15

2.1 +CGMI: REQUEST MANUFACTURER IDENTIFICATION ......................................................................... 15 2.2 +CGMM: REQUEST MODEL IDENTIFICATION ...................................................................................... 16 2.3 +CGMR: REQUEST REVISION IDENTIFICATION ................................................................................... 17 2.4 +CGSN: REQUEST PRODUCT SERIAL NUMBER IDENTIFICATION .......................................................... 18 2.5 +CSCS: SELECT TE CHARACTER SET ................................................................................................. 19 2.6 +CIMI: REQUEST INTERNATIONAL MOBILE SUBSCRIBER IDENTITY..................................................... 21 2.7 +CMUX: MULTIPLEXING MODE ......................................................................................................... 22 2.8 +WS46: SELECT WIRELESS NETWORK................................................................................................. 27 2.9 A/: REPEATING A COMMAND LINE ....................................................................................................... 28 2.10 Z: RESET TO DEFAULT CONFIGURATION............................................................................................... 29 2.11 &F: SET TO FACTORY-DEFINED CONFIGURATION ................................................................................. 30 2.12 I: REQUEST IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION......................................................................................... 31 2.13 +GMI: REQUEST MANUFACTURER IDENTIFICATION ............................................................................ 32 2.14 +GMM: REQUEST MODEL IDENTIFICATION......................................................................................... 33 2.15 +GMR: REQUEST REVISION IDENTIFICATION ...................................................................................... 34 2.16 +GSN: REQUEST PRODUCT SERIAL NUMBER IDENTIFICATION ............................................................. 35 2.17 +GCAP: REQUEST COMPLETE CAPABILITIES LIST ............................................................................... 36 2.18 S3: COMMAND LINE TERMINATION CHARACTER ................................................................................. 37 2.19 S4: RESPONSE FORMATTING CHARACTER............................................................................................ 38 2.20 S5: COMMAND LINE EDITING CHARACTER .......................................................................................... 39 2.21 E: COMMAND ECHO ............................................................................................................................ 40

M7-21-0010-107 - 5 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.22 Q: RESULT CODE SUPPRESSION ........................................................................................................... 41 2.23 V: DCE RESPONSE FORMAT................................................................................................................. 42 2.24 X: RESULT CODE SELECTION AND CALL PROGRESS MONITORING CONTROL......................................... 43 2.25 &C: CIRCUIT 109 (RECEIVED LINE SIGNAL DETECTOR) BEHAVIOR...................................................... 44 2.26 &D: CIRCUIT 108 (DATA TERMINAL READY) BEHAVIOR ...................................................................... 45 2.27 +IPR: FIXED DTE RATE ...................................................................................................................... 46 2.28 +ICF: DTE-DCE CHARACTER FRAMING............................................................................................. 48 2.29 +IFC: DTE-DCE LOCAL FLOW CONTROL ........................................................................................... 50 2.30 +ILRR: DTE-DCE LOCAL RATE REPORTING....................................................................................... 52 2.31 +DS: DATA COMPRESSION .................................................................................................................. 54 2.32 +DR: DATA COMPRESSION REPORTING................................................................................................ 55 2.33 $TIME: RTC TIME............................................................................................................................ 57 2.34 $DATE: RTC DATE........................................................................................................................... 58

3 CALL CONTROL COMMANDS............................................................................................................ 59

3.1 +CSTA: SELECT TYPE OF ADDRESS.................................................................................................... 59 3.2 +CMOD: CALL MODE ........................................................................................................................ 60 3.3 +CHUP: HANG UP CALL ..................................................................................................................... 61 3.4 +CBST: SELECT BEARER SERVICE TYPE.............................................................................................. 62 3.5 +CRLP: RADIO LINK PROTOCOL......................................................................................................... 64 3.6 +CR: SERVICE REPORTING CONTROL .................................................................................................. 65 3.7 +CRC: CELLULAR RESULT CODES ...................................................................................................... 66 3.8 +CSNS: SINGLE NUMBERING SCHEME................................................................................................ 68 3.9 D: DIAL .............................................................................................................................................. 69 3.10 W: WAIT FOR DIAL TONE ..................................................................................................................... 71 3.11 T: SELECT TONE DIALING (DIAL MODIFIER) ......................................................................................... 72 3.12 P: SELECT PULSE DIALING (DIAL MODIFIER)........................................................................................ 73 3.13 A: ANSWER......................................................................................................................................... 74 3.14 H: HOOK CONTROL ............................................................................................................................. 75 3.15 S0: AUTOMATIC ANSWER .................................................................................................................... 76 3.16 L: MONITOR SPEAKER LOUDNESS ....................................................................................................... 77 3.17 +++: ESCAPE FROM DATA MODE.......................................................................................................... 78 3.18 O: RETURN TO DATA MODE ................................................................................................................. 79 3.19 %CPI: CALL PROGRESS INFORMATION................................................................................................ 80

4 NETWORK SERVICE RELATED COMMANDS ................................................................................ 84

4.1 +CNUM: SUBSCRIBER NUMBER ......................................................................................................... 84

M7-21-0010-107 - 6 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


4.2 +CREG: NETWORK REGISTRATION..................................................................................................... 85 4.3 +COPS: OPERATOR SELECTION .......................................................................................................... 87 4.4 +CLCK: FACILITY LOCK .................................................................................................................... 89 4.5 +CPWD: CHANGE PASSWORD ............................................................................................................ 91 4.6 +CLIP: CALLING LINE IDENTIFICATION PRESENTATION ...................................................................... 92 4.7 +CLIR: CALL LINE IDENTIFICATION RESTRICTION .............................................................................. 94 4.8 +COLP: CONNECTION LINE IDENTIFICATION PRESENTATION .............................................................. 95 4.9 +CCUG: CLOSED USER GROUP........................................................................................................... 97 4.10 +CCFC: CALL FORWARDING SERVICE................................................................................................. 98 4.11 +CCWA: CALL WAITING SERVICE..................................................................................................... 100 4.12 +CHLD: CALL RELATED SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES........................................................................ 102 4.13 +CUSD: UNSTRUCTURED SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE DATA .............................................................. 103 4.14 +CAOC: ADVICE OF CHARGE ........................................................................................................... 104 4.15 +CSSN: SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE NOTIFICATIONS.......................................................................... 105 4.16 +CPOL: PREFERRED PLMN LIST ..................................................................................................... 107 4.17 +CLCC: LIST CURRENT CALLS ......................................................................................................... 109 4.18 +COPN: READ OPERATOR NAMES .....................................................................................................111 4.19 $GNC: GET NEIGHBOR CELLS............................................................................................................112 4.20 %BAND: DYNAMIC MULTIBAND.......................................................................................................113 4.21 %CREG: NETWORK EXTENDED REGISTRATION STATUS.....................................................................114

5 MOBILE EQUIPMENT CONTROL AND STATUS COMMANDS...................................................115

5.1 +CPAS: PHONE ACTIVITY STATUS......................................................................................................115 5.2 +CFUN: SET PHONE FUNCTIONALITY................................................................................................116 5.3 $SRN: FACILITY STATUS NOTIFICATION .............................................................................................117 5.4 +CPIN: ENTER PIN ...........................................................................................................................118 5.5 +CSQ: SIGNAL QUALITY................................................................................................................... 120 5.6 +CRSM: RESTRICTED SIM ACCESS .................................................................................................. 121 5.7 +CLVL: LOUDSPEAKER VOLUME LEVEL........................................................................................... 123 5.8 +CMUT: MUTE ................................................................................................................................ 124 5.9 +CACM: ACCUMULATED CALL METER............................................................................................. 125 5.10 +CAMM: ACCUMULATED CALL METER MAXIMUM........................................................................... 126 5.11 +CPUC: PRICE PER UNIT AND CURRENCY TABLE .............................................................................. 127 5.12 +CCWE: CALL METER MAXIMUM EVENT ........................................................................................ 128 5.13 +CSVM: SET VOICE MAIL NUMBER ................................................................................................ 129 5.14 +CLAC: LIST ALL AVAILABLE AT COMMANDS .................................................................................. 130 5.15 %PVRF: GET PIN1, PIN2, PUK1, PUK2 REMAINING NUMBER ....................................................... 131

M7-21-0010-107 - 7 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.16 +VTS: DTMF AND TONE GENERATION ............................................................................................. 132 5.17 +WDTMF: PLAY DTMF TONE ......................................................................................................... 133 5.18 +VGR: RECEIVE GAIN SELECTION .................................................................................................... 134 5.19 +VGT: TRANSMIT GAIN SELECTION.................................................................................................. 135 5.20 $POWEROFF: POWER OFF .............................................................................................................. 136 5.21 $CSQ: PERIODIC SIGNAL QUALITY REPORT ..................................................................................... 137 5.22 $SP: CONTROL AUDIO PATH .............................................................................................................. 138 5.23 $SG: CONTROL AUDIO GAIN ............................................................................................................. 139 5.24 $SAMP: CONTROL AUDIO AMPLIFICATION ....................................................................................... 141 5.25 $SAEC: CONFIGURE THE ACOUSTIC ECHO CANCELLER .................................................................... 142 5.26 $SCS: AUDIO CONFIGURATION SELECT............................................................................................. 143 5.27 $SCW: AUDIO CONFIGURATION WRITE ............................................................................................. 144 5.28 $SQCS: AUDIO QUALITY COEFFICIENTS PROFILE SELECT ................................................................. 145 5.29 $SQC: AUDIO QUALITY COEFFICIENTS CONTROL.............................................................................. 146 5.30 $SQCW: AUDIO QUALITY COEFFICIENTS PROFILE WRITE ................................................................. 149 5.31 $TRING: SET DURATION TO CLIP DATA ON INCOMING CALL ............................................................. 150 5.32 +GDT: PLAY A CALL TONE ................................................................................................................ 151 5.33 $NOSLEEP: DISABLE DEEP SLEEP MODE........................................................................................ 152 5.34 $CSSL: PLAY TONE ON SPEAKER ..................................................................................................... 153 5.35 $GLED: GREEN LED SETTING......................................................................................................... 154

6 PHONEBOOK COMMANDS................................................................................................................ 155

6.1 +CPBS: SELECT PHONEBOOK MEMORY STORAGE ............................................................................. 155 6.2 +CPBR: READ PHONEBOOK ENTRIES................................................................................................ 157 6.3 +CPBF: FIND PHONEBOOK ENTRIES ................................................................................................. 159 6.4 +CPBW: WRITE PHONEBOOK ENTRY................................................................................................ 161

7 SHORT MESSAGES COMMANDS ..................................................................................................... 162

7.1 +CSMS: SELECT MESSAGE SERVICE ................................................................................................. 162 7.2 +CPMS: PREFERRED MESSAGE STORAGE ......................................................................................... 164 7.3 +CMGF: MESSAGE FORMAT............................................................................................................. 166 7.4 +CSCA: SERVICE CENTRE ADDRESS ................................................................................................. 167 7.5 +CSMP: TEXT MODE PARAMETERS .................................................................................................. 168 7.6 +CSDH: SHOW TEXT MODE PARAMETERS ........................................................................................ 170 7.7 +CSCB: SELECT CELL BROADCAST MESSAGE TYPES ........................................................................ 171 7.8 +CSAS: SAVE SETTINGS ................................................................................................................... 173 7.9 +CRES: RESTORE SETTINGS............................................................................................................. 174

M7-21-0010-107 - 8 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


7.10 +CNMI: NEW MESSAGE INDICATIONS TO TE .................................................................................... 175 7.11 +CMGL: LIST MESSAGES ................................................................................................................. 178 7.12 +CMGD: DELETE MESSAGE ............................................................................................................. 180 7.13 +CMGC: SEND COMMAND ............................................................................................................... 181 7.14 +CMGR: READ MESSAGE................................................................................................................. 183 7.15 +CNMA: NEW MESSAGE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT TO ME/TA.............................................................. 186 7.16 +CMGS: SEND SHORT MESSAGE....................................................................................................... 187 7.17 +CMSS: SEND SHORT MESSAGE FROM THE STORAGE ....................................................................... 188 7.18 +CMGW: SEND WRITE MESSAGE TO MEMORY ............................................................................... 189

8 FAX CONTROL...................................................................................................................................... 190

8.1 +FDT: SEND A PAGE.......................................................................................................................... 190 8.2 +FDR: RECEIVE A PAGE .................................................................................................................... 191 8.3 +FKS: TERMINATE A SESSION, ORDERLY FAX ABORT......................................................................... 193 8.4 +FIP: INITIALIZE SERVICE CLASS 2 PARAMETERS.............................................................................. 194 8.5 DCE RESPONSES, +FCS: REPORT DCS FRAME INFORMATION.......................................................... 195 8.6 DCE RESPONSES, +FIS: REPORT REMOTE CAPABILITIES, DIS ........................................................... 197 8.7 DCE RESPONSES, +FPI: REPORT REMOTE ID,CIG ............................................................................ 198 8.8 DCE RESPONSES, +FNC: REPORT NSC FRAME................................................................................. 199 8.9 DCE RESPONSES, +FNF: REPORT NSF FRAME ................................................................................. 200 8.10 DCE RESPONSES, +FNS: REPORT NSS FRAME ................................................................................. 201 8.11 DCE RESPONSES, +FPW: REPORT PASSWORD................................................................................... 202 8.12 DCE RESPONSES, +FSA: REPORT DESTINATION SUBADDRESS .......................................................... 203 8.13 DCE RESPONSES, +FPA: REPORT POLLING ADDRESS ........................................................................ 204 8.14 DCE RESPONSES, +FPS: REPORT T.30 PHASE C PAGE RECEPTION..................................................... 205 8.15 DCE RESPONSES, +FHS: CALL TERMINATION STATUS ...................................................................... 207 8.16 +FCLASS: SERVICE CLASS IDENTIFICATION AND CONTROL ............................................................. 209 8.17 +FCC: DCE CAPABILITIES PARAMETER ............................................................................................ 210 8.18 +FIS: CURRENT SESSION PARAMETER................................................................................................211 8.19 +FCS: CURRENT SESSION RESULTS (FAX CLASS 2.0)......................................................................... 212 8.20 +FLI: LOCAL FACSIMILE STATION ID STRING, TSI/CSI ..................................................................... 213 8.21 +FPI: LOCAL FACSIMILE STATION ID, CIG(LOCAL POLLING ID)....................................................... 214 8.22 +FNS: PASS-THROUGH NON-STANDARD NEGOTIATION BYTE STRING ................................................ 215 8.23 +FLP: INDICATE DOCUMENT AVAILABLE FOR POLLING ..................................................................... 216 8.24 +FSP: REQUEST TO POLL .................................................................................................................. 217 8.25 +FCR: CAPABILITY TO RECEIVE........................................................................................................ 218 8.26 +FBU: HDLC FRAME REPORTING ENABLE ....................................................................................... 219

M7-21-0010-107 - 9 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.27 +FNR: NEGOTIATION REPORTING ENABLE........................................................................................ 220 8.28 +FAP: ADDRESS & POLLING CAPABILITIES ....................................................................................... 221 8.29 +FSA: ADDRESS & POLLING FRAME/SUBADDRESS ........................................................................... 222 8.30 +FPA: ADDRESS & POLLING FRAME/POLLING ADDRESS.................................................................... 223 8.31 +FPW: ADDRESS & POLLING FRAME/PASSWORD .............................................................................. 224 8.32 +FIE: PROCEDURE INTERRUPT ENABLE ............................................................................................ 225 8.33 +FPS: PAGE STATUS .......................................................................................................................... 226 8.34 +FCQ: COPY QUALITY CHECKING..................................................................................................... 228 8.35 +FRQ: RECEIVE QUALITY CHECKING................................................................................................ 230 8.36 +FCT: DTE PHASE C RESPONSE TIMEOUT ........................................................................................ 231 8.37 +FHS : CALL TERMINATION STATUS.................................................................................................. 232 8.38 +FMS: MINIMUM PHASE C SPEED ..................................................................................................... 233 8.39 +FIT: INACTIVITY TIMEOUT.............................................................................................................. 234 8.40 +FBS: REPORT BUFFER SIZE ............................................................................................................. 235 8.41 +FBO: DATA BIT ORDER ................................................................................................................... 236 8.42 +FEA: PHASE C RECEIVED EOL ALIGNMENT ................................................................................... 237 8.43 +FFC: IMAGE DATA FORMAT CONVERSION........................................................................................ 238 8.44 +FLO: FLOW CONTROL..................................................................................................................... 239

9 GPRS RELATED COMMANDS ........................................................................................................... 240

9.1 +CGDCONT: DEFINE PDP CONTEXT............................................................................................... 240 9.2 +CGQREQ: QUALITY OF SERVICE PROFILE...................................................................................... 242 9.3 +CGQMIN: QUALITY OF SERVICE PROFILE (MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE) .............................................. 245 9.4 +CGATT: GPRS ATTACH OR DETACH ............................................................................................... 248 9.5 +CGACT: PDP CONTEXT ACTIVATE OR DEACTIVATE ........................................................................ 249 9.6 +CGDATA: ENTER DATA STATE........................................................................................................ 251 9.7 +CGPADDR: SHOW PDP ADDRESS.................................................................................................. 253 9.8 +CGAUTO: AUTOMATIC RESPONSE TO A NETWORK REQUEST FOR PDP CONTEXT ACTIVATION........ 255 9.9 +CGANS: MANUAL RESPONSE TO A NETWORK REQUEST FOR PDP CONTEXT ACTIVATION ............... 257 9.10 + CGCLASS: GPRS MOBILE STATION CLASS ................................................................................... 260 9.11 + CGEREP: GPRS EVENT REPORTING.............................................................................................. 261 9.12 + CGREG: GPRS NETWORK REGISTRATION STATUS......................................................................... 263 9.13 + CGSMS: SELECT SERVICE FOR MO SMS MESSAGES..................................................................... 265 9.14 D: REQUEST GPRS SERVICE ............................................................................................................. 266 9.15 S0: AUTOMATIC RESPONSE TO A NETWORK REQUEST FOR PDP CONTEXT ACTIVATION ...................... 268 9.16 A: MANUAL ACCEPTANCE OF A NETWORK REQUEST.......................................................................... 269 9.17 H: MANUAL REJECTION OF A NETWORK REQUEST FOR PDP CONTEXT ACTIVATION ........................... 270

M7-21-0010-107 - 10 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


9.18 %CGAATT: GPRS AUTOMATIC ATTACH MODE ................................................................................ 271 9.19 %CGPPP: PPP AUTHENTICATION PROTOCOL.................................................................................... 272 9.20 %PPP: PREPARE CIRCUIT-SWITCHED DATA CALL ............................................................................. 273 9.21 %CGREG: GPRS NETWORK EXTENDED REGISTRATION STATUS....................................................... 274

10 M2M COMMANDS ................................................................................................................................ 276

10.1 $NWACT: M2M ACTIVATE OR DEACTIVATE ..................................................................................... 276 10.2 $NWSO: SESSION OPEN OR CLOSE .................................................................................................. 278 10.3 $NWDF: SELECT M2M DATA FORMAT ............................................................................................. 280 10.4 $NWDW: WRITE DATA INTO THE TX-BUFFER .................................................................................. 281 10.5 $NWDR: READ DATA FROM THE RX-BUFFER ................................................................................... 283 10.6 $NWCN: CONNECTION OR DISCONNECTION TO A SERVER ................................................................ 285 10.7 $NWTX: SEND DATA TO A SERVER.................................................................................................... 287 10.8 $NWRX: INDICATION OF RECEIVING DATA ....................................................................................... 289

11 SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT COMMANDS .................................................................................. 291

11.1 %SATM: SET SAT COMMAND/RESPONSE FORMAT ........................................................................... 291 11.2 %SATC: CONFIGURATION FOR SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT.............................................................. 292 11.3 %SATE: SEND SAT ENVELOP COMMAND......................................................................................... 298 11.4 %SATR: SEND SAT RESPONSE ......................................................................................................... 300 11.5 %SATT: TERMINATE SAT COMMAND OR SESSION ............................................................................ 303

12 ERROR REPORT COMMANDS AND ERROR CODE..................................................................... 304

12.1 +CMEE: REPORT MOBILE EQUIPMENT ERROR .................................................................................. 304 12.2 +CME ERROR: ME ERROR RESULT CODE ....................................................................................... 305 12.3 +CMS ERROR: MESSAGE SERVICE FAILURE RESULT CODE .............................................................. 309 12.4 +CEER: EXTENDED ERROR REPORT ..................................................................................................311 12.5 +CEER EXTENDED ERROR RESULT CODE .......................................................................................... 312 12.6 +EXT ERROR: EXTENDED ERROR RESULT CODE ............................................................................. 314

M7-21-0010-107 - 11 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


1 Introduction

1.1 Introduction to Interface between TE and MS

In order to communicate each other between TE and MS, we must use AT commands. Figure 1.1 illustrates the interface. In addition, we will describe about SIM, list management, mobility management, call control, supplementary service, short message, cell broadcast, base-band and the other service in next section. Figure 1.1

1.1.1 Explanation

Command Possible response(s) ME Mobile equipment MS Mobile station. Basically, a mobile station is mobile equipment with a SIM card.TE Terminal Equipment that is the same as the controller in this case.

1.1.2 Getting started

For testing AT commands, the MS can be connected to any computer environment, as long as it has a V.24/V.28 serial interface. The commands can be issued with, for example, HyperTerminal in Microsoft Windows or other emulator programs.

1.1.3 Syntax description

This section gives a brief description of the syntax used for the command set. The MS may echo characters which is received, depending on the setting of the command E. As a default, echo is enabled. In addition, the received characters are echoed by the same rate, parity, and format. The character defined by parameter S5 (default, BS, IRA 8) is interpreted to be a request from the TE for deleting the previous character.

TE MS

AT COMMAND

M7-21-0010-107 - 12 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


Command Possible response(s) <CR> Carriage return character, whose value is specified by command S3,

default IRA 13. <LF> Line feed character, whose value is specified by command S4, default

IRA 10. <…> The name enclosed in angle brackets is a syntactical element. The

brackets do not appear in the command line. […] Strings enclosed in square brackets are optional items

(sub-parameters). The brackets do not appear in the command line.

Other characters, including ‘?’,’=’, parentheses, etc, appear in commands and response as written.

1.1.4 AT command syntax

A command line is composed of three elements: the prefix, the body and the termination character. The prefix part starts from the characters ‘AT’ and follows by basic syntax command (eg: ATV1), or by a plus sign (+) together with extended syntax command (eg: AT+CFUN=1) which MS supports as well. Basic syntax command The format of basic syntax commands, except for the command D, is as follows: <name>[<value>] Example:

ATV1

Extended syntax command +<name>[=<value>] Example:

AT+CMUT=0 Test command syntax +<name>=? Example:

ATS3=? Read command syntax +<name>? Example:

AT+CACM? If the indicated name is not recognized, an Error code is issued.

M7-21-0010-107 - 13 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


1.1.5 AT response syntax

The <response> can be: Basic format result code

OK Extended syntax result code, prefixed with a plus sign (+)

+<name>: <value> The result codes will be separated by commas if it includes several values. The <value> followed by the colon is separated by a space. It is also possible that result codes have no value. Unlike basic format result codes, extended syntax result codes have no numeric equivalent, and are always issued in alphabetic form. There are two types of result code responses: Final result code A final result code indicates to the TE that execution of the command is completed and another command may be issued. If you type an implemented AT command, you should get the result code OK. If you type an AT command which is not ready for users, or the parameter or syntax you provide is wrong, you will get the result code ERROR or something else, for example, +CME ERROR followed by an error code. Unsolicited result code Unsolicited result codes, such as RING, indicate that the occurrence caused by an event is not directly associated with a command which is issued from TE.

M7-21-0010-107 - 14 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


1.2 Document conventions

1.2.1 Parameter type

The parameter type indicates what kind of value a parameter stands for. The type of a parameter could be one of the following:

Numeric String Hexadecimal

Example:

Parameter(s) <manufacturer> Manufacture ID String

1.2.2 Default value

The default value of a parameter is underlined. Example: 0

M7-21-0010-107 - 15 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2 General Commands

2.1 +CGMI: Request manufacturer identification

Read the model’s manufacturer ID.

Syntax AT+CGMI Response(s) <manufacturer>

OK +CME ERROR: <err>

Parameter(s) <manufacturer> Manufacture ID, Qisda. String

Example(s) Request manufacturer identification AT+CGMI Qisda OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 16 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.2 +CGMM: Request model identification

Read model information which is determined by ME manufacturer.

Syntax AT+CGMM Response(s) <model>


Parameter(s) <model> Model identification String

Example(s) Request model identification AT+CGMM M33 OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 17 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.3 +CGMR: Request revision identification

Read revision of ME. It includes software and hardware revision.

Syntax AT+CGMR Response(s) <SW revision>

<HW revision> <build date> <build time> OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Parameter(s) <SW revision> Software version number with m.nn format, where the

m is the major number, n is the minor number String

<HW revision> Hardware version number, use the same format as software version.

String

<build date> Software build date with MM DD YYYY format String <build time> Software build time with h:m:s format String

Example(s) Request revision identification AT+CGMR SW ver: 1.00 HW ver: 1.00 Build Date: Dec 13 2007 Build Time: 09:15:11 OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 18 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.4 +CGSN: Request product serial number identification

Read serial number identification which is determined by ME manufacturer.

Syntax AT+CGSN Response(s) <sn>


Parameter(s) <sn> Serial number String

Example(s) Request product serial number identification AT+CGSN 446019197507595 OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 19 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.5 +CSCS: Select TE character set

Set command informs TA which character set “<chset>” is used by the TE. TA is then able to convert character strings correctly between TE and ME character sets. When TA-TE interface is set to 8-bit operation and its TE alphabet is 7 bit, the highest bit shall be set to zero. Read command returns the current setting and Test command displays conversion schemes implemented in the TA.

Syntax AT+CSCS=[<chset>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CSCS? Response(s) +CSCS: <chset>


AT+CSCS=? Response(s) +CSCS: (list of supported <chset>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <chset> Character set type which is used by TE String “IRA” International reference alphabet. “HEX” Character strings consist only of hexadecimal numbers from 00 to

FF;e.g. “032FE6” equals three 8-bit characters with decimal values 3,47 and 230;no conversions to the original ME character set shall be done.

“GSM” GSM alphabet. “UCS2” 16-bit universal multiple-octet coded character set; UCS2 character

strings are converted to hexadecimal numbers from 0000 to FFFF. ; e.g. “004100620063” equals three 16-bit characters with decimal values 65,98 and 99.

“8859-1” ISO 8859 Latin 1 character set. “PCCP437” PC character set Code Page 437. “PCDN” PC Danish/Norwegian character set.

M7-21-0010-107 - 20 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


Example(s) List all supported alphabet types AT+CSCS=? +CSCS:”GSM”,”IRA”,”PCCP437”,”PCDN”,”8859-1”,”HEX”,”UCS2” OK

(1) Test command (2) All supported types

Change TE character set type AT+CSCS=”UCS2” OK AT+CPBR=1,3 +CPBR: 1,”12345”,129,”00520061006E00640079” +CPBR: 2,”2”,129,”004300610020” +CPBR: 3,”3”,129,”00450020” AT+CSCS=”IRA” OK AT+CPBR=1,3 +CPBR: 1,”12345”,129,”Randy” +CPBR: 2,”2”,129,”Ca” +CPBR: 3,”3”,129,”E” OK

1. Set alphabet to UCS2 2. Read data from phonebook 3. Set alphabet to IRA 4. Read data from phonebook

M7-21-0010-107 - 21 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.6 +CIMI: Request international mobile subscriber identity

Execution command causes the TA to return <IMSI>, which is intended to permit the TE for identifying the individual SIM that is attached to ME.

Syntax AT+CIMI Response(s) <IMSI>


Parameter(s) <IMSI> IMSI number String

Example(s) Request international mobile subscriber identity AT+CIMI 466880100493652 OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 22 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.7 +CMUX: Multiplexing mode

This command is used to enable/disable the GSM 07.10 multiplexing protocol control channel. Refer to subclause 9.2 for possible <err> values. The AT commands sets parameters for the Control Channel. If the parameters are left out, the default value is used. Read command returns the current mode and the settings. Test command returns the supported modes and parameters. It is recommended that the ME/TA/TE should autobaud to the +CMUX command up to and including an interface speed of 9600 bits/s. The OK or +CME ERROR: <err> response is returned at the speed of the +CMUX command prior to entering <mode>. It is recommended that whenever the multiplexer control channel is released the ME/TA/TE should assume an interface rate of up to and including 9600 bits/s for auto bauding purposes irrespective of any previous higher speed having been selected. If a +CMUX command is issued whilst in any multiplexer mode then that +CMUX command shall be ignored and the ME/TA shall return an +CME ERROR: <err> response.

Syntax AT+CMUX=<mode>[,<subset>[,<port_speed>[,<N1>[,<T1>[,<N2>[,<T2>[,<T3>[,<k>]]]]]]]] Response(s) +CME ERROR: <err>

AT+CMUX? Response(s) OK

AT+CMUX= ? Response(s) +CMUX: (list of supported <mode>s), (list of supported

<subset>s), (list of supported <port_speed>s), (list of supported <N1>s), (list of supported <T1>s), (list of supported <N2>s), (list of supported <T2>s), (list of supported <T3>s), (list of supported <k>s)

Parameter(s) <mode> Multiplexer Transparency Mechanism Numeric 0 Basic Option

M7-21-0010-107 - 23 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


1 Advanced option <subset> This parameter defines the way in which the multiplexer

control channel is set up. A virtual channel may subsequently be set up differently but in the absence of any negotiation for the setting of a virtual channel, the virtual channel shall be set up according to the control channel <subset> setting.

Numeric

0 UIH frames used only. 1 UI frames used only. 2 I frames used only. <port_speed> transmission rate Numeric 1 9600 bits/s 2 19200 bits/s 3 38400 bits/s 4 57600 bits/s 5 115200 bits/s 6 230400 bits/s <N1> maximum frame size Numeric 1-32768 default Value: 31 (64 if Advanced option is used) <T1> acknowledgement timer in units of ten milliseconds Numeric 1-255 default Value: 10 (100 ms) <N2> maximum number of re-transmissions Numeric 0-100 default Value: 3 <T2> response timer for the multiplexer control channel in

units of ten milliseconds Numeric

2-255 default Value: 30 (300 ms) NOTE: T2 must be longer than T1.

<T3> wake up response timer in seconds Numeric 1-255 default Value: 10 <k> window size, for Advanced operation with Error

Recovery options Numeric

1-7 default Value: 10

Example(s) Request international mobile subscriber identity AT+CMUX=? +CMUX: (1),(0),(1-5),(10.-100),(1-255),(0-100),(2-255),(1-255),(1-7) OK

Mux Example

Request: 05:38:36.812492864 (+300.4480146000 seconds)

41 54 45 30 51 30 56 31 0D ATE0Q0V1

M7-21-0010-107 - 24 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


Normal AT command mode at initial

Answer: 05:38:36.822507464 (+0.0100146000 seconds)

0D 0A 4F 4B 0D 0A ..OK..

The response of ATE0Q0V1

Request: 05:38:37.583617064 (+0.5908614000 seconds)

41 54 2B 43 4D 55 58 3D 31 2C 30 2C 35 0D AT+CMUX=1,0,5.

Mux mode enable command Advanced without error recovery

Answer: 05:38:37.593631664 (+0.0100146000 seconds)

0D 0A 4F 4B 0D 0A ..OK..

The response of MUX mode command

From now on all command and information should be encapsulated with HDLC format

Request: 05:38:38.394799664 (+0.8011680000 seconds)

7E 03 3F FC 7E ~.?ü~

First SABM packet to start DLC 0 (that is , disconnected mode)

Answer: 05:38:38.404814264 (+0.0100146000 seconds)

7E 03 73 85 7E ~.s…~

The ACK of first SABM

After the response packet is send , the control channel ,DLC 0 is established

Request: 05:38:38.655179264 (+0.2503650000 seconds)

M7-21-0010-107 - 25 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


7E 07 3F 89 7E ~.?‰~

Send the second SABM packet to start DLC 1

Answer: 05:38:38.655179264 (+0.0000000000 seconds)

7E 07 73 F0 7E 7E 01 FF E3 05 07 0D B6 7E 7E 05 ~.sð~~.ÿã...¶~~.

EF 41 54 2D 43 6F 6D 6D 61 6E 64 20 49 6E 74 65 ïAT-Command Inte

72 70 72 65 74 65 72 20 72 65 61 64 79 0D 0A DF rpreter ready..ß

7E 7E 01 FF E3 05 07 0D B6 7E 7E 01 FF E3 05 07 ~~.ÿã...¶~~.ÿã..

0D B6 7E 7E 01 FF E3 05 07 0D B6 7E .¶~~.ÿã...¶~

There are sequence responses form the module, let’s analyze step by step

7E 07 73 F0 7E

The ACK of DLC 1, there are two DLC exist now

7E 01 FF E3 05 07 0D B6 7E

UIH control frame to DLC 1 with modem status message

7E 05 EF 41 54 2D 43 6F 6D 6D 61 6E 64 20 49 6E 74 6572 70 72 65 74 65 72 20 72 65 61

64 79 0D 0A DF 7E

UIH information frame to DLC 1 , it’s a normal information.

Note that the information field

“41 54 2D 43 6F 6D 6D 61 6E 64 20 49 6E 74 6572 70 72 65 74 65 72 20 72 65 61 64 79

0D 0A” is the string “AT-Command Interpreter ready..” to note the TE.

This field is quiet different form UIH control frame, user should take care about this.

7E 01 FF E3 05 07 0D B6 7E


(retransmit)

7E 01 FF E3 05 07 0D B6 7E


M7-21-0010-107 - 26 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


(retarnsmit)

As you can see the TE do not response the UIH control frame at all. The module just retransmit the frame until for N2 times. After retrying N2 times, the module give up.

M7-21-0010-107 - 27 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.8 +WS46: select wireless network

Set command will set WDS side stack <n> to be used by the TA. Read command shows current setting and Test command displays side stacks implemented in the TA.

Syntax AT+WS46=[<n>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+WS46? Response(s) +WS46: <n>


AT+WS46=? Response(s) +WS46: (list of supported <n>s)]


Parameter(s) <n> Wireless network type Numeric 12 GSM digital cellular.

M7-21-0010-107 - 28 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.9 A/: Repeating a command line

If the prefix "A/" or "a/" is received, the DCE will immediately execute the body of the preceding command line once again. No editing is possible, and no termination character is necessary. A command line may be repeated multiple times through this mechanism, if it is requested. Responses from the repeated command line shall be issued using the same parity and format as the original command line, and the same rate of the "A/". If "A/" is received before completely executing any command line, the preceding command line is assumed to be empty (that results in an OK result code).

Syntax A/ Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

M7-21-0010-107 - 29 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.10 Z: Reset to default configuration

This command instructs the DCE to set all parameters to their factory default values specified by the manufacturer. Moreover, the settings of hardware configuration switches or non-volatile parameter storage (if it is implemented) may be took into consideration as well. If the DCE is connected to the line, it will be disconnected and will terminate any call in progress once ATZ command is executed. All functions of the command shall be done completely before the DCE issues the result code. The DTE should not include additional commands on the same command line after the Z command; otherwise, these extra commands may be ignored. An OK result code for this command is issued using the same rate, parity, and format as the DTE command line that contains the command, but the different new values for parameters that affect the format of result codes (e.g. Q, V, S3, S4).

Syntax ATZ[<N>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Parameter(s)

<N> Numeric 0 Reset to profile number 0

M7-21-0010-107 - 30 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.11 &F: Set to factory-defined configuration

This command instructs the DCE to set all parameters to default values specified by the manufacturer, which may take into consideration of hardware configuration switches and other manufacturer-defined criteria. An OK result code for this command is issued using the same rate, parity, and format as the DTE command line that contains the command; however, the factory-defined values is used for other parameters that affect the format of result codes (e.g. Q, V, S3, S4). Besides, it is dependent upon other commands that may follow the same command line.

Syntax AT&F[<N>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Parameter(s) <N> Parameter sets/shows the result code presentation

status in the TA. Numeric

0 Set parameters to factory defaults. Other Reserved for manufactory proprietary use.

M7-21-0010-107 - 31 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.12 I: Request identification information

This command causes the DCE to transmit one or more lines of information text, determined by the manufacturer, follow by a final result code. <N> may be used optionally to get specific information from the multiple types of identifying information, specified by the manufacturer.

Syntax ATI<N> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Parameter(s) <N> Type of identifying information Numeric 0-1

M7-21-0010-107 - 32 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.13 +GMI: Request manufacturer identification

This command causes the DCE to transmit one or more lines of information text, determined by the manufacturer, which is intended to permit the user of the DCE for identifying the manufacturer. Typically, the text will consist of a single line that contains the name of the manufacturer; nevertheless, manufacturers may tend to provide more information (e.g. address, telephone number for customer service, etc.) if there is a request. About the response, the total number of characters, including line terminators, within the information text returned for this command shall not exceed 2048 characters. Note that the information text shall not contain the sequence “0 <CR>” or “OK<CR>” for DTE to avoid false detection of the information text.

Syntax AT+GMI Response(s) <Manufacturer>


AT+GMI=? Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Parameter(s) <Manufacturer> Manufacturer information String

Example(s) Request manufacturer identification AT+GMI Qisda OK

1. Ask manufacturer name

M7-21-0010-107 - 33 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.14 +GMM: Request model identification

This command causes the DCE to transmit one or more lines of information text, determined by the manufacturer, which is intended to permit the user of the DCE for identifying the specific model of device. Typically, the text will consist of a single line that contains the name of the product; nevertheless, manufacturers may tend to provide any information which is requested. About the response, the total number of characters, including line terminators, within the information text returned for this command shall not exceed 2048 characters. Note that the information text shall not contain the sequence “0 <CR>” or “OK<CR>” for DTE to avoid false detection of the information text.

Syntax AT+GMM Response(s) <Model name>


AT+GMM=? OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Parameter(s) <Model name> Report information to identify the information of the

device String

Example(s) Request model identification AT+GMM M33 OK

1. Ask model id

M7-21-0010-107 - 34 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.15 +GMR: Request revision identification

This command causes the DCE to transmit one or more lines of information text, determined by the manufacturer, which is intended to permit the user of the DCE for identifying the version, revision level or date, or other pertinent information of the device. Typically, the text will consist of a single line that contains the version of the product; nevertheless, manufacturers may tend to provide any information which is requested. About the response, the total number of characters, including line terminators, within the information text returned for this command shall not exceed 2048 characters. Note that the information text shall not contain the sequence “0 <CR>” or “OK<CR>” for DTE to avoid false detection of the information text.

Syntax AT+GMR Response(s) SW ver:<x.y>

HW ver:<x.y> Build Date:mm dd yyyy Build Time:HH:MM:SS OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+GMR=? OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Example(s) Request revision identification AT+GMR SW ver: 1.10 HW ver: 1.00 Build Date: Dec 13 2007 Build Time: 07:07:22 OK

1. Ask version number

M7-21-0010-107 - 35 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.16 +GSN: Request product serial number identification

This command causes the DCE to transmit one or more lines of information text, determined by the manufacturer, which is intended to permit the user of the DCE for identifying the individual device. Typically, the text will consist of a single line that contains a manufacturer represented by a alpha-numeric string; nevertheless, manufacturers may tend to provide any information which is requested. About the response, the total number of characters, including line terminators, within the information text returned for this command shall not exceed 2048 characters. Note that the information text shall not contain the sequence “0 <CR>” or “OK<CR>” for DTE to avoid false detection of the information text.

Syntax AT+GSN Response(s) <sn>


AT+GSN=? Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Parameter(s) <sn> IMEI of the telephone Numeric

Example(s) Request product serial number identification AT+GSN 004400003501234 OK

1. Request serial id

M7-21-0010-107 - 36 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.17 +GCAP: Request complete capabilities list

This extended-format command causes the DCE to transmit one or more lines of information text with a specific format. The content is a list displays additional capabilities command +<name>s, which is intended to permit the user of the DCE for identifying the overall capabilities of the DCE. In particular, if the DCE implements a particular DCE control standard, which uses Extended Syntax Commands and includes command(s) that indicate general capabilities, the +<name>(s) of the those commands shall be reported to the DCE in response to a +GCAP command. Examples can be seen from the following table.

Syntax AT+GCAP Response(s) +GCAP:<name>


Parameter(s) <name> Report a list of capabilities String

Example(s) Request complete capabilities list AT+GCAP +GCAP: +CGSM,+FCLASS OK

1. Get capabilities list

M7-21-0010-107 - 37 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.18 S3: Command line termination character

This S-parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character recognized by the DCE from the DTE for terminating an incoming command line. It is also generated by the DCE as part of the header, trailer, and terminator for result codes and information text, along with the S4 parameter (see the description of the V parameter for usage). The previous value of S3 is used to determine the command line termination character for the entry of the command line which contains the S3 setting command. However, the result code issued will base on the value of S3 set during the process of the command line. For example, if S3 was previously set to 13 and the command line “ATS3=30” is issued, the command line shall be terminated with a CR character (IA5 0/13), but the result code issued will use the character with the ordinal value 30 (IA5 2/14) in place of the CR.

Syntax ATS3=<n> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Parameter(s) <n> Set command line termination character to this value. Numeric 0-13-127

M7-21-0010-107 - 38 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.19 S4: Response formatting character

This S-parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character generated by the DCE as part of the header, trailer, and terminator for result codes and information text, along with the S3 parameter (see the description of the V parameter for usage). If the value of S4 is changed in a command line, the result code issued will be base on the new value of S4.


+CME ERROR: <err>

Parameter(s) <n> Set response formatting character to this value. Numeric 0-10-127

M7-21-0010-107 - 39 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.20 S5: Command line editing character

This S-parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character recognized by the DCE as a request for deleting this specific character from the command line immediately.


+CME ERROR: <err>

Parameter(s) <n> Set command line editing character to this value. Numeric 0-8-127

M7-21-0010-107 - 40 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.21 E: Command echo

The setting of this parameter determines whether or not the DCE echoes characters received from the DTE during command state and online command state.

Syntax ATE[<value>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Parameter(s) <value> Set command line editing character to this value. Numeric 0 DCE does not echo characters during command state and online

command state. 1 DCE echoes characters during command state and online command

state.

M7-21-0010-107 - 41 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.22 Q: Result code suppression

The setting of this parameter determines whether or not the DCE transmits result codes to the DTE. When result codes are suppressed, no portion of any intermediate, final, or unsolicited result code – header, result text, line terminator, or trailer – is transmitted. Information text transmitted in response to commands is not affected by the setting of this parameter.

Syntax ATQ[<n>] Response(s) If <n> =0

OK If <n> =1

None

Parameter(s) <n> Set command line editing character to this value. Numeric 0 DCE transmits result codes. 1 Result codes are suppressed and not transmitted.

M7-21-0010-107 - 42 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.23 V: DCE response format

The setting of this parameter determines the contents of the header and trailer transmitted with result codes and information responses. It also determines whether result codes are transmitted in a numeric form or an alphabetic (or "verbose") form. The text portion of information responses is not affected by this setting.

Syntax ATV[<value>] Response(s) When value=0

0 When value=1

OK

Parameter(s) <value> DCE transmits full headers and trailers and verbose

response text. Numeric

0 DCE transmits limited headers and trailers and numeric text. 1 DCE transmits full headers and trailers and verbose response text.

M7-21-0010-107 - 43 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.24 X: Result code selection and call progress monitoring control

The setting of this parameter determines whether or not the DCE transmits particular result codes to the DTE. It also controls if the DCE verifies the presence of dial tone when it first goes off-hook to begin dialing or not. Besides, it is also responsible for controlling the detection of engaged tone (busy signal) to see if it is enabled or not. However, this setting has no effect neither on the operation of the W dial modifier, which always checks for dial tone regardless of this setting, nor on the busy signal detection capability of the W and @ dial modifiers.

Syntax ATX[<value>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Parameter(s) <value> Numeric 0 CONNECT result code is given upon entering online data state. Dial tone

and busy detection are disabled. 1 CONNECT <text> result code is given upon entering online data state.

Dial tone and busy detection are disabled. 2 CONNECT <text> result code is given upon entering online data state.

Dial tone detection is enabled, and busy detection is disabled. 3 CONNECT <text> result code is given upon entering online data state.

Dial tone detection is disabled, and busy detection is enabled. 4 CONNECT <text> result code is given upon entering online data state.

Dial tone and busy detection are both enabled.

M7-21-0010-107 - 44 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.25 &C: Circuit 109 (Received line signal detector) behavior

This parameter determines how the state of circuit 109 relates to the detection of received line signal from the distant end. Changing the parameter will take effect immediately in both the command and online command states. In &C1 mode of operation, circuit 109 is not turned off until all data previously received from the remote DCE is delivered to the local DTE. However, such buffered data shall be discarded and circuit 109 has to be turned off if the DTE turns off circuit 108 (if &D1 or &D2 is set).

Syntax AT&C[<value>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Parameter(s) <value> Numeric 0 The DCE always presents the ON condition on circuit 109. 1 Circuit 109 changes in accordance with the underlying DCE, which

may include functions other than the physical layer functions (e.g. Recommendation V.42, V.110, V.120 and V.13).

M7-21-0010-107 - 45 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.26 &D: Circuit 108 (Data terminal ready) behavior

This parameter determines how the DCE responds when circuit 108/2 is changed from the ON to the OFF condition during online data state.

Syntax AT&D[<value>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Parameter(s) <value> Numeric 0 DCE ignores circuit 108/2. 1 Upon an on-to-off transition of circuit 108/2, the DCE enters online

command state and issues an OK result code; the call remains connected.

2 Upon an on-to-off transition of circuit 108/2, the DCE instructs the underlying DCE to perform an orderly clear down of the call. The disposition of any data in the DCE pending transmission to the remote DCE is controlled by the ETBM parameter if implemented; otherwise, this data is sent before the call is cleared, unless the remote DCE clears the call first (in which case pending data is discarded). The DCE disconnects from the line. Automatic answer is disabled while circuit 108/2 remains off.

M7-21-0010-107 - 46 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.27 +IPR: Fixed DTE rate

This command, the numeric extended-format parameter specifies the data rate which the DCE will accept. in addition to 1200 bit/s or 9600 bit/s. It may be used to choose operation with the rates which the DCE is not capable of automatically detecting the data rate that is being used by the DTE. Specifying a value of 0 disables the function and allows operation only at rates which can be automatically detected by the DCE. The specified rate takes effect according to the issuance of any result code(s) associated with the current command line. The rate specified does not apply to online Data State if direct mode of operation is chose. The rate value specified shall be calculated in bits per second for the DTE-DCE interface to handle, e.g. "19 200" or "115 200". The rates supported by a particular DCE are manufacturer-specific; however, the IPR parameter should permit the setting of any rate supported by the DCE during online operation. Rates which include a non-integral number of bits per second should be truncated to the next lower integer (e.g. 134. 5 bit/s should be specified as 134; 45.45 bit/s should be specified as 45). If the rate is unspecified or set to 0, automatic detection will pick up a rate. In addition, the character format is also forced to auto-detect, ICF 0. It is recommended that the default value for this parameter is set to be the automatic detection setting (0), which facilitates initial DTE-DCE communications.

Syntax AT+IPR=<rate> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+IPR? Response(s) +IPR:<rate>


AT+IPR=? Response(s) +IPR: (list of auto-detected <rate>s),(list of fixed-only

<rate>s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Parameter(s) <rate> Baud rate Numeric 75 75 bit/s

M7-21-0010-107 - 47 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


150 150 bit/s 300 300 bit/s 600 600 bit/s 1200 1200 bit/s 2400 2400 bit/s 4800 4800 bit/s 7200 7200 bit/s 9600 9600 bit/s 14400 14400 bit/s 19200 19200 bit/s 28800 28800 bit/s 33900 33900 bit/s 38400 38400 bit/s 57600 57600 bit/s 115200 115200 bit/s

M7-21-0010-107 - 48 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.28 +ICF: DTE-DCE character framing

This extended-format compound parameter is used to determine the local serial port start-stop (asynchronous) character framing that the DCE shall use while accepting DTE commands and while transmitting information text and result code, if this is not automatically determined; IPR 0 forces ICF 0. Note that the definition of fixed character format for online data state is for further study. Format determines the number of bits in the data bits, the presence of a parity bit, and the number of stop bits in the start-stop frame.

Syntax AT+ICF=[<format>[,<parity>]] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+ICF? Response(s) +ICF: <format>[,<parity>]


AT+ICF=? Response(s) +ICF: (list of supported <format>s),(list of supported

<parity>s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Parameter(s) format Valid numeric values Numeric 1 8 Data 2 Stop 2 8 Data 1 Parity 1 Stop 3 8 Data 1 Stop 4 7 Data 2 Stop 5 7 Data 1 Parity 1 Stop 6 7 Data 1 Stop parity Defined numeric values Numeric 0 Odd 1 Even 2 Mark 3 Space

Example(s) DTE-DCE character framing AT+ICF=? +ICF: (1-6),(0-3) OK

1. Get character framing

M7-21-0010-107 - 49 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


AT+ICF? +ICF: 3 OK AT+ICF=1 OK AT+ICF? +ICF: 1 OK

2. Query current value 3. Set new value 4. Query current value

M7-21-0010-107 - 50 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.29 +IFC: DTE-DCE local flow control

This extended-format compound parameter is used to control the operation of local flow control between the DTE and DCE during the data state while V.42 error control is being used, or when fallback to non-error control mode is specified to include buffering and flow control.

Syntax AT+IFC=[<DCE_by_DTE>[,<DTE_by_DCE>]] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+IFC? Response(s) +IFC:<DCE_by_DTE>,<DTE_by_DCE>


AT+IFC=? Response(s) +IFC: (list of <DCE_by_DTE>),(list of <DTE_by_DCE>)


Parameter(s) <DCE_by_DTE> Specifies the method to be used by the DTE to

control the flow of received data from the DCE Numeric

0 None 1 DC1/DC3 on circuit 103; do not pass DC1/DC3 characters to the

remote DCE 2 Circuit 133 (Ready for Receiving) <DTE_by_DCE> Specifies the method to be used by the DCE to

control the flow of transmitted data from the DTE Numeric

0 None 1 DC1/DC3 on circuit 104 2 Circuit 106 (Clear to Send/Ready for Sending)

Example(s) DTE-DCE local flow control AT+IFC=? +IFC: (0-2),(0-2) OK AT+IFC? +IFC: 2,2 OK AT+IFC=0,0 OK

1. List local flow control option 2. Query current value 3. Set new value

M7-21-0010-107 - 51 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


AT+IFC? +IFC: 0,0 OK

4. Query current value

M7-21-0010-107 - 52 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.30 +ILRR: DTE-DCE local rate reporting

This extended-format numeric parameter controls whether or not the extended-format "　ILRR: rate" information text is transmitted from the DCE to the DTE. The rate reported shall represent the current DTE-DCE rate. If it is enabled, the intermediate result code is transmitted after any modulation, error control or data compression reports are transmitted, but before any final result code (e.g. CONNECT) is transmitted. The rate is applied after the final result code is transmitted. The DTE-DCE port rate will only be changed under the situations of (1) neither buffered mode nor error-controlled means are enabled (　ES　x,0); (2) the negotiated carrier rate (MRR) does not match the current DTE-DCE port rate (set by IPR command or auto-detected from the previous command line).

Syntax AT+ILRR=<mode> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+ILRR? Response(s) +ILRR:<mode>


AT+ILRR=? Response(s) +ILRR: (list of supported <mode>s)


Unsolicited Result Codes ILRR: <rate>

Parameter(s) <mode> Reporting mode Numeric 0 Disables reporting of local port rate (+ILRR: is not transmitted) 1 Enables reporting of local port rate (+ILRR: is transmitted) <rate> Port rate setting upon connection setup (bps) Numeric

Example(s) DTE-DCE local rate reporting AT+ILRR=? +ILRR: (0,1) OK AT+ILRR? +ILRR: 0

1. Get local rate reporting 2. Query current value

M7-21-0010-107 - 53 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


OK AT+ILRR=1 OK AT+ILRR? +ILRR: 1 OK

3. Set new value 4. Query current value

M7-21-0010-107 - 54 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.31 +DS: Data compression

This extended-format compound parameter controls the V.42 bis data compression function if it is provided in the DCE.

Syntax AT+DS[<direction>[,<compression_negotiation> [,<max_dict>[,<max_string>]]]] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> ATDS? Response(s) DS: <direction>,

<compression_negotiation>,<max_dict>,<max_string> OK

+CME ERROR: <err> ATDS=? Response(s) DS: (list of supported <direction>s),(list of supported

<compression_negotiation>s),(list of supported <max_dict>s), (list of supported <max_string>s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Parameter(s) <direction> Specifies the desired direction(s) of operation of

the data compression function; from the DTE point of view

Numeric

0 Negotiated...no compression (V.42 bis P0=0) 1 Transmit only 2 Receive only 3 Both directions, accept any direction (V.42 bis P0=11) <compression_ negotiation>

Specifies whether or not the DCE should continue to operate if the desired result is not obtained

Numeric

0 Do not disconnect if Rec. V.42 bis is not negotiated by the remote DCE as specified in direction

1 Disconnect if Rec. V.42 bis is not negotiated by the remote DCE as specified in direction

<max_dict> Specifies the maximum number of dictionary entries which should be negotiated (may be used by the DTE to limit the codeword size transmitted, based on its knowledge of the nature of the data to be transmitted)

Numeric

512-65535 Default settings determined by the manufacturer <max_string> Specifies the maximum string length to be

negotiated (V.42 bis P2) Numeric

6-250

M7-21-0010-107 - 55 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.32 +DR: Data compression reporting

This extended-format numeric parameter controls whether or not the extended-format "DR:" intermediate result code is transmitted from the DCE to the DTE. The DR: type reported shall represent the current (negotiated or renegotiated) DCE-DCE data compression type. If it allows the intermediate result code to be reported, the intermediate result code will be transmitted after error control negotiation (handshaking) which the DCE has already decided which data compression technique will be used (if any) and the direction for transmitting. The format of this result code described as follows: DR: NONE, Data compression is not in use DR: V42B, Rec. V.42 bis is in use in both directions DR: V42B RD, Rec. V.42 bis is in use in receive direction only DR: V42B TD, Rec. V.42 bis is in use in transmit direction only

Syntax AT+DR=<value> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+DR? Response(s) +DR: <value>


AT+DR=? Response(s) +DR: (list of <value>)


Parameter(s) <value> Numeric 0 Data compression reporting disabled (no DR result code transmitted) 1 Data compression reporting enabled (DR result code transmitted)

Example(s) Data compression reporting AT+DR? +DR:0 OK AT+DR=1 OK AT+DR? +DR:1

1. Query current value 2. Set new value 3. Query current value

M7-21-0010-107 - 56 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 57 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.33 $TIME: RTC TIME

This command is used to set the time in RTC. It uses the 24-Hour format.

Syntax AT$TIME=<HH,MM,SS> Response(s) HH/MM/DD

OK +CMS ERROR: <err>

AT$TIME? Response(s) HH/MM/DD

OK AT$TIME=? Response(s) $TIME: <HH>,<MM>,<SS>

OK

Parameter(s) <HH> The hour field Numeric 0-23 <MM> The minute field Numeric 0-59 <SS> The second field Numeric 0-59

Example(s) Set time AT$TIME=19,07,09 19/07/09 OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 58 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2.34 $DATE: RTC DATE

This command is used to set the date in RTC.

Syntax AT$DATE= <YYYY,MM,DD> Response(s) YYYY/MM/DD


AT$DATE? Response(s) YYYY/MM/DD

OK AT$DATE=? Response(s) $DATE: YYYY/MM/DD

OK

Parameter(s) <YYYY> The year field Numeric 2000-2024 <MM> The month field Numeric 1-12 <DD> The day field Numeric 1-31

Example(s) Set date AT$DATE=2007,01,23 2007/01/23 OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 59 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


3 Call Control Commands

3.1 +CSTA: Select Type of Address

Set command selects a specific number for further dialing command (D) according to GSM/UMTS specifications. Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value.

Syntax +CSTA=<type> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CSTA? Response(s) +CSTA: <type>


AT+CSTA=? Response(s) +CSTA: (list of supported <type>s)


Parameter(s) <type> Type of address octet in integer Numeric 129 Dialing string without international access code “+”. 145 Dialing string includes international access code character “+”.

Example(s) Set type of address AT+CSTA=145 OK

1. Set address type to 145

List all available types AT+CSTA=? +CSTA: (129,145) OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 60 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


3.2 +CMOD: Call mode

Set command selects the call mode for further dialing commands (D) or for next answering command (A). Mode can be either single or alternating. Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value.

Syntax AT+CMOD=[<mode>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CMOD? Response(s) +CMOD: <mode>


AT+CMOD=? Response(s) +CMOD: (list of supported <mode>s)


Parameter(s) <mode> Call mode type Numeric 0 Single mode. 1 Alternating voice/fax (teleservice 61). 2 Alternating voice/data (bearer service 61). 3 Voice followed by data (bearer service 81).

M7-21-0010-107 - 61 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


3.3 +CHUP: Hang up call

Execution command causes the TA to hang up the current GSM/UMTS call of the ME.

Syntax AT+CHUP Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CHUP=? Response(s) OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 62 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


3.4 +CBST: Select bearer service type

Set command is able to set the bearer service <name> together with data rate <speed> and the connection element <ce> which is used when data calls occurred. Values may also be used during mobile terminated data call setup, especially in the situation that single numbering scheme calls in/out.

Syntax AT+CBST=[<speed>[,<name>[,<ce>]]] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CBST? Response(s) +CBST: <speed>,<name>,<ce>


AT+CBST=? Response(s) +CBST: (list of supported <speed>s),(list of supported <name>s), (list

of supported <ce>s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Parameter(s) <speed> Data rate of bearer service Numeric 0 Autobauding 1 300 bps (V.21). 2 1200 bps (V.22). 3 1200/75 bps (V.23). 4 2400 bps (V.22bis). 5 2400 bps (V.26ter). 6 4800 bps (V.32). 7 9600 bps (V.32). 12 9600bps (V.34). 14 14400 bps (V.34). 65 300 bps (V.110). 66 1200 bps (V.110). 68 2400 bps (V.110 or X.31 flag stuffing). 70 4800 bps (V.110 or X.31 flag stuffing). 71 9600 bps (V.110 or X.31 flag stuffing). 75 14400 bps (V.110 or X.31 flag stuffing). <name> Bearer service type Numeric 0 Data circuit asynchronous (UDI or 3.1k HZ modem). <ce> Connection element Numeric 0 Transparent. 1 Non-transparent.

M7-21-0010-107 - 63 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2 Both, transparent preferred. 3 Both, non-transparent preferred.

Example(s) Set bearer service type AT+CBST=6,0,1 OK AT+CBST? +CBST: 6,0,1 OK

1. Change bearer service type 2. Query setting status

List all available types AT+CBST=? +CBST: (0-7,12,14,65,66,68,70,71,75),(0),(0-3) OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 64 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


3.5 +CRLP: Radio link protocol

Radio link protocol (RLP) parameters used when non-transparent data calls occurred, but may be changed by set command. Available command sub-parameters may be provided depends on the RLP versions implemented by the device (currently only version 1 is supported). Read command returns current setting for supported RLP version. Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value.

Syntax AT+CRLP=[<iws>[,<mws>[,<T1>[,<N2>]]]] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CRLP? Response(s) +CRLP: <iws>,<mws>,<T1>,<N2>


AT+CRLP=? Response(s) +CRLP: (list of supported <iws>s),(list of supported <mws>s),(list of

supported <T1>s),(list of supported <N2>s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Parameter(s) <iws> IWF to MS window size Numeric 0–61 <mws> MS to IWF window size Numeric 0–61 <T1> Acknowledgement timer (units of 10 ms) Numeric 39–255 Default value: 48 <N2> Retransmission attempts Numeric 1–255 Default value: 6

M7-21-0010-107 - 65 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


3.6 +CR: Service reporting control

Set command controls whether or not intermediate result code +CR: <serv> is returned from the TA to the TE. If this is enabled, the intermediate result code will be transmitted during connect negotiation which the TA has already determined which speed and quality of service will be used, and before any error control or data compression reports are transmitted, and before the intermediate result code CONNECT is transmitted.

Syntax AT+CR=[<mode>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CR? Response(s) +CR: <mode>


AT+CR=? Response(s) +CR: (list of supported <mode>s)


Unsolicited Result Codes +CR: <serv>

Parameter(s) <mode> Service report mode Numeric 0 Disables reporting. 1 Enables reporting. <serv> Service type report String “ASYNC” Asynchronous transparent “SYNC” Synchronous transparent “REL ASYNC” Asynchronous non-transparent "REL SYNC” Synchronous non-transparent

Example(s) Enable service report AT+CR=1 +CR:1 OK ATD024496688 +CR: REL ASYNC CONNECT

1. Enable reporting 2. Setup a data call 3. Service report

M7-21-0010-107 - 66 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


3.7 +CRC: Cellular result codes

Set command controls whether or not the extended format of incoming call indication is used. When it is enabled, an incoming call is indicated to the TE with unsolicited result code +CRING: <type> instead of the normal RING. Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value.

Syntax AT+CRC=[<mode>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CRC? Response(s) +CRC: <mode>


AT+CRC=? Response(s) +CRC: (list of supported <mode>s)


Unsolicited Result Codes +CRING: <type>

Parameter(s) <mode> Extended format mode Numeric 0 Disables extended format 1 Enables extended format <type> Service type report String “ASYNC” Asynchronous transparent “SYNC” Synchronous transparent “REL ASYNC” Asynchronous non-transparent “REL SYNC” Synchronous non-transparent “FAX” Facsimile (TS 62) “VOICE” Normal voice (TS 11) “VOICE/XXX” Voice followed by data (BS81) (XXX is ASYNC, SYNC, REL ASYNC or

REL SYNC) “ALT VOICE/XXX” Alternating voice/data, voice first (BS 61) “ALT XXX/VOICE” Alternating voice/data, data first (BS 61) “ALT VOICE/FAX” Alternating voice/fax, voice first (TS 61) “ALT FAX/VOICE” Alternating voice/fax, fax first (TS 61)

M7-21-0010-107 - 67 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


Example(s) Enables extended format AT+CRC=1 OK +CRING: VOICE

1. Enables extended format 2. MT call indication

M7-21-0010-107 - 68 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


3.8 +CSNS: Single numbering scheme

Set command can set the bearer or teleservice should be used when mobile terminated single numbering scheme call is established. Parameter values set with +CBST command shall be used when <mode> equals to a data service. Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value.

Syntax AT+CSNS=[<mode>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CSNS? Response(s) +CSNS: <mode>


AT+CSNS=? Response(s) +CSNS: (list of supported <mode>s)


Parameter(s) <mode> Service mode Numeric 0 Voice 1 Alternating voice/fax, voice first (TS 61) 2 Fax (TS 62) 3 Alternating voice/data, voice first (BS 61) 4 Data 5 Alternating voice/fax, fax first (TS 61) 6 Alternating voice/data, data first (BS 61) 7 Voice followed by data (BS 81)

M7-21-0010-107 - 69 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


3.9 D: Dial

This command instructs the DCE to create a call. This may include several steps, depending upon the DCE type, such as: connecting to the line (going off-hook), waiting for the network to indicate readiness to receive call addressing information (wait for dial tone), signaling call addressing information to the network (dialling the number), monitoring the line for call progress signals (e.g. busy), and instructing the underlying DCE to start the call procedure (modulation handshaking). All characters follow the "D" and up to a semicolon character (IA5 3/11) or the end of the command line are considered to be part of the call addressing information and be signaled to the network, or to be modifiers used for controlling the signaling process (this is known as a "dial string"). If the dial string is terminated by a semicolon, the DCE does not start the call procedure defined for the underlying DCE, but returns to command state instead after signaling the call addressing information to the network. Any characters within the dial string that the DCE does not recognize as a valid part of the call addressing information or a valid modifier shall be ignored. This permits characters such as parentheses and hyphens to be included since they are typically used as part of the telephone numbers.

Syntax ATD[<dial_string>][;] Response(s) CONNECT

If connection is successfully established and X0 is selected. This result code is transmitted immediately before circuit 109 is turned on.

CONNECT <text> Connection is successfully established and Xn is selected where "n" is any value other than 0. This result code is transmitted immediately before circuit 109 is turned on. The contents of text are manufacturer　　 -specific, and may include indication of DTE interface speed, line speed, error control and data compression techniques in use, and other information NO CARRIER

If a connection cannot be established, or was aborted by reception of an additional character from the DTE ERROR If issued while in online command state BUSY

If busy signal detection is enabled or the W or @ dial modifier is used, and a busy signal is detected NO ANSWER

If the "@" dial modifier is used, and remote ringing followed by five seconds of silence is not detected before the expiration of the connection timer defined by S7

M7-21-0010-107 - 70 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


NO DIALTONE If dial tone detection is enabled or the W dial modifier is used, and no dial

tone is detected within the associated timeout period OK

If command is aborted by either reception of an additional character from the DTE or by the DTE turning off circuit 108 (if &D1 or &D2 is selected; see 6.2. 9), or if the dial string is terminated by a semicolon character

Parameter(s) <Dial_string> Phone number Numeric <text> Connection status String

M7-21-0010-107 - 71 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


3.10 W: Wait for dial tone

This causes DCE to listen to dial tone on the line. If a valid dial tone is detected, the DCE continues processing the remainder of the dial string. If DCE decides to abort dialing because the dial tone does not occur within the connection timeout period specified by parameter S7, the NO DIALTONE or NO CARRIER result code is issued and the remainder of the command line is ignored. The DCE may, but is not required to, detect busy signal while listening to dial tone. This capability may be conditioned upon the setting of the X command. The BUSY or NO CARRIER result codes may be issued if the DCE detects a busy signal while listening to dial tone; in this event, the remainder of the command line is ignored.

Syntax ATW Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

M7-21-0010-107 - 72 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


3.11 T: Select tone dialing (dial modifier)

This causes subsequent dial digits to be signaled using DTMF. The effect of the T modifier may forward to subsequent D commands (i.e. once a T dial modifier is used, all subsequent dialing uses DTMF tones until a P dial modifier or command is issued); however, it is recommended that the DTE explicitly specify pulse or DTMF dialing with an appropriate dial modifier (P or T) at the beginning of each dial string.

Syntax ATT Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

M7-21-0010-107 - 73 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


3.12 P: Select pulse dialing (dial modifier)

The effect of the P modifier may forward to subsequent D commands (i.e. once a P dial modifier is used, all subsequent dialing uses pulse dialing until a T dial modifier or command is issued); however, it is recommended that the DTE explicitly specify pulse or DTMF dialing with an appropriate dial modifier (P or T) at the beginning of each dial string.

Syntax ATP Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

M7-21-0010-107 - 74 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


3.13 A: Answer

This command instructs the DCE to immediately connect to the line and start the answer sequence as specified from the underlying DCE. Any additional commands that follow A on the same command line are ignored.

Syntax ATA Response(s) CONNECT

If connection is successfully established and X0 is selected. This result code is transmitted immediately before circuit 109 is turned on

CONNECT <text> If connection is successfully established and Xn is selected where "n" is any value other than 0. This result code is transmitted immediately before circuit 109 is turned on. The contents of text are manufacturer　　 -specific, and may include indication of DTE interface speed, line speed, error control and data compression techniques in use, and other information

NO CARRIER If a connection cannot be established, or was aborted by reception of an additional character from the DTE

ERROR If issued while in online command state

OK If command is aborted by either reception of an additional character from the DTE or by the DTE turning off circuit 108 (if &D1 or &D2 is selected; see 6.2. 9), or if the dial string is terminated by a semicolon character

Parameter(s) <text> Connection status String

M7-21-0010-107 - 75 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


3.14 H: Hook control

This command instructs the DCE to disconnect from the line, terminate any call in progress. All functions of the command shall be completed before DCE issues any result code.

Syntax ATH[value] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Parameter(s) <value> Numeric 0 Disconnect from line and terminate call.

M7-21-0010-107 - 76 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


3.15 S0: Automatic answer

This S-parameter controls the automatic answering feature of the DCE. If it is set to 0, automatic answering is disabled. On the other hand, If it is set to a non-zero value, the DCE shall be responsible for answering once the incoming call indication (ring) has occurred for the specific times indicated by the value. For example, in GSTN modem applications, setting this parameter to 1 will cause the modem to answer an incoming call on the first ring.


+CME ERROR: <err> ATS0? Response(s) <n>


ATS0=? Response(s) S0: (list of supported <n>s)


Parameter(s) <n> Numeric 0 Automatic answering is disabled. 1-255 Enable automatic answering on the ring number specified.

Example(s) Automatic answer ATS0=? S0(0-255) OK ATS0? 000 OK ATS0=1 OK ATS0? 001 OK

1. Get parameter 2. Query current value 3. Set new value 4. Query current value

M7-21-0010-107 - 77 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


3.16 L: Monitor speaker loudness

This parameter controls the volume of the monitor speaker. The specific loudness level indicated by "low", "medium", and "high" depends on manufacturer-specific, although they are intended to indicate increasing volume.

Syntax ATL[value] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Parameter(s) <value> Speaker volume Numeric 0 Low speaker volume 1 Low speaker volume 2 Medium speaker volume 3 High speaker volume

M7-21-0010-107 - 78 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


3.17 +++: Escape from data mode

This command is used to escape from the data mode and enter to command mode. To prevent misinterpret the data with +++ pattern as escape sequence, it must be wait for a guard time (1 second) before and after the sequence. Please refer to ATO which is also the command return to data mode.

Syntax

+++ Response(s) OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 79 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


3.18 O: Return to data mode

This command returns to data mode which escapes via +++ command before. Please refer to “+++”.

Syntax

ATO Response(s) Return to data mode successfully.

CONNECT Connection fails.

NO CARRIER

M7-21-0010-107 - 80 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


3.19 %CPI: Call progress information

This command refers to call progress information, which is indicated by the network during call establishment. The set command enables/disables the presentation of unsolicited notification result codes from TA to TE. When <n>=1 and a call progress information is received during a call establishment, intermediate result code %CPI: <cId>,<msgType>,<ibt>,<tch> is sent to TE. <cId> identifies the call in the call table. The value of <msgType> describes the layer 3 message type that was used to transfer the call progress information. The state of TCH assignment and the use of in-band tones for that call can be monitored by the values of <ibt> and <tch>. When <n>=2 and a call progress information is received during a call establishment, intermediate result code %CPI: <cId>, <msgType>, <ibt>, <tch>, [<dir>], [<mode>], [<cli validity>] [,<number>[,<ton>][,<alpha>]] is sent to TE. <cId> identifies the call in the call table. The value of <msgType> describes the layer 3 message type that was used to transfer the call progress information. The state of TCH assignment and the use of in-band tones for that call can be monitored by the values of <ibt> and <tch>. <dir> describes the direction of the call. <CLI validity> describes the validity of calling line identification. The value of <mode> describes the mode of the call (e.g. voice or data). <number> is call number. The value of <toa> describes the type of number (e.g. international number starting with '+'). <alpha> is the alpha identifier of the called number as stored in the phonebook.

Syntax AT%CPI=<n> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT%CPI? Response(s) %CPI: <n>


AT%CPI =? Response(s) %CPI: (list of support <n>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <n> Parameter sets/shows the result code presentation


0 Disable 1 Enable

M7-21-0010-107 - 81 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2 Enable with call number information <cId> Call identification number as described in GSM 02.30

sub-clause 4.5.5.1 Numeric

<msgType> Layer 3 message type Numeric 0 Setup message 1 Disconnect message 2 Alert message 3 Call proceed message 4 Synchronization message 5 Progress message 6 Call connected message <ibt> Status of the usage of in-band tones Numeric 0 No in-band tones 1 In-band tones <tch> TCH assignment Numeric 0 TCH not assigned 1 TCH assigned <dir> Numeric 0 Mobile originated call 1 Mobile terminated call <mode> Numeric 0 Voice 1 Data 2 Fax 3 Vfdvoice 4 Vadvoice 5 Vafvoice 6 Vfddata 7 Vaddata 8 Vaffax 9 Unknown <CLI validity> Numeric 0 CLI valid 1 CLI has been withheld by the originator 2 CLI is not available due to inter-working problems or limitations of

originating network. <number> Number of dialed/connected call Numeric <toa> Type of address octet (ton/npi) Numeric <alpha> Alpha identifier of dialed/connected call if available in

phonebook Numeric

Example(s) When AT%CPI=1 AT%CPI=1 ATD0921214863;

1. Make an outgoing call and accept the call

M7-21-0010-107 - 82 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


OK %CPI: 1,4,0,1 (MO make the call-0921214863) %CPI: 1,2,1,1 %CPI: 1,6,1,1 (MT accept the call) %CPI: 1,1,0,1 (end the call) NO CARRIER AT%CPI=1 ATD0921214863; OK %CPI: 1,4,0,1 %CPI: 1,2,1,1 %CPI: 1,5,1,1 (accept progress message) ATH OK AT%CPI=1 RING %CPI: 1,4,1,1 ATA OK %CPI: 1,0,1,0 RING %CPI: 1,6,1,1 (accept the call) ATH OK AT%CPI=1 RING %CPI: 1,4,1,1 (Synchronization message) RING ATA (accept an incoming call) OK RING RING %CPI: 1,6,1,1 ATD0921214863; (make an outgoing call) OK %CPI: 2,2,1,1 %CPI: 2,6,1,1 (accept the outgoing call) ATH OK

2. Make an outgoing call and reject the call

3. Accept an incoming call

4. Accept an incoming call and then make an outgoing call

When AT%CPI=2 ATD0921214863; OK %CPI: 1,4,0,1,0,0,,"0921214863",129 (MO make the call -0921214863 ) %CPI: 1,2,1,1,0,0,,"0921214863",129 %CPI: 1,6,1,1,0,0,,"0921214863",129 (MT accept the call) %CPI: 1,1,0,1 NO CARRIER ATD0921214863;

1. Make an outgoing call and accept the call

2. Make an outgoing call and reject the

M7-21-0010-107 - 83 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


OK %CPI: 1,4,0,1,0,0,,"0921214863",129 %CPI: 1,2,1,1,0,0,,"0921214863",129 %CPI: 1,5,1,1,0,0,,"0921214863",129 (MT reject the call and MO get progress message) ATH OK %CPI: 1,0,1,0,1,0,1 RING %CPI: 1,4,1,1,1,0,1 (Synchronization message) ATA (accept the incoming call) OK RING RING %CPI: 1,6,1,1,1,0,1 (connect the call) ATH (hang up the call) OK %CPI: 1,0,1,0,1,0,1 RING %CPI: 1,4,1,1,1,0,1 ATA (accept the incoming call) OK %CPI: 1,6,1,1,1,0,1 (connect the call) ATD0921214863; (make an outgoing call-0921214863) OK %CPI: 2,2,1,1,0,0,1,"0921214863",129 %CPI: 2,6,1,1,0,0,1,"0921214863",129 %CPI: 2,1,0,1 (MT-0921214863 hang up) NO CARRIER ATH (hang up) OK

call 3. Accept an incoming call 4. Accept an incoming call and then make an outgoing call

M7-21-0010-107 - 84 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


4 Network Service Related Commands

4.1 +CNUM: Subscriber number

Set command returns the MSISDN related to the subscriber (this information can be stored in the SIM or in the ME.) If subscriber has different MSISDN for different services, each MSISDN is returned in a separate line (<CR><LF>).

Syntax AT+CNUM Response(s) +CNUM: <alpha>,<number>,<type>


AT+CNUM=? Response(s) OK

Parameter(s) <number> Phone number String <alpha> Optional alphanumeric string associated with

<number>;used character set should be the one selected with command (Select TE Character Set +CSCS).

String

<type> Type of address octet Numeric 129 Dialing string without international access code “+”. 145 Dialing string includes international access code character “+”.

Example(s) Read subscriber number from MSISDN list AT+CPBS=”ON” OK AT+CPBW=1,”0960530355”,,”WM0” OK AT+CPBR=1 +CPBR: 1,”0960530355”,129,”WM0” OK AT+CNUM +CNUM: “WM0”,”0960530355”,129 OK

1. Select MSISDN list 2. Write data to location 1 3. Read data from location 1 4. Get subscriber number

M7-21-0010-107 - 85 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


4.2 +CREG: Network registration

Set command controls the presentation of an URC code +CREG: <stat> when <n>=1 or 2. Read command returns the status of result code presentation and an integer <state> which shows whether the network has currently indicated the registration of the ME. Test command returns a list of supported <n>.

Syntax AT+CREG=[<n>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CREG? Response(s) +CREG: <n>,<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]

OK AT+CREG=? Response(s) +CREG: (list of supported <n>s)

OK Unsolicited Result Codes +CREG: <n>,<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]

Parameter(s) <n> Unsolicited Result Codes presentation mode Numeric 0 Disable network registration unsolicited result code. 1 Enable network registration unsolicited result code.

+CREG: <stat> 2 Enable network registration and location information unsolicited result

code. +CREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]

<stat> Registration status Numeric 0 Not registered, ME is not currently searching a new operator to

register to (NO SERVICE) 1 Registered, home network 2 Limiting Service: not registered but ME is currently searching a new

operator to register to 3 Limiting Service: registration denied 4 Unknown 5 Registered, roaming <lac> Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format. String <ci> Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format. String

M7-21-0010-107 - 86 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


Example(s) Enable network registration and location information unsolicited result code AT+CREG=2 OK AT+CREG? +CREG: 2, 5, ”100F”, ”0000” OK

1. Switch URC to mode 2 2. Get both network

registration and location area information

M7-21-0010-107 - 87 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


4.3 +COPS: Operator selection

Set command forces an attempt to choose and register the GSM network operator. <mode> is used to choose whether the selection is done automatically by the ME or is forced by this command to operator <oper>. Read command returns the current mode and the currently selected operator. If no operator is selected, <format> and <oper> are omitted. Test command returns a list of quadruplets, each represents an operator who is present in the network. Quadruplet consists of an integer indicates the availability of the operator <state>, long and short alphanumeric format of the name of the operator, and numeric format representation of the operator. Any of the formats may be unavailable and should then be an empty field. The list of operators shall be in order: home network, networks referenced in SIM, and other networks. In addition, after the operator list, TA returns lists of supported <mode>s and <format>s delimited from the operator list by two commas.

Syntax AT+COPS=[<mode>[,<format>[,<oper>]]] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+COPS? Response(s) +COPS: <mode>[,<format>,<oper>]

OK AT+COPS=? Response(s) +COPS: [list of supported(<state>,[long alphanumeric<oper>], [short

alphanumeric<oper>], numerica <oper>)s] [,(list of supported <mode>s), (list of supported <format>s)] OK

Parameter(s) <mode> Network operator selection mode Numeric 0 Auto selection 1 Manual selection 2 Manually deregister from network and remain unregistered until

<mode>=0 or 1 or 4 is selected. 3 Set only <format>.No attempt registration.<oper> shall be omitted. 4 Manual/automatic (<oper> fields shall be present);if manual selection

fails, automatic mode (<mode>=0)is entered. <format> Format of network operator representation Numeric 0 Long format alphanumeric type. 1 Short format alphanumeric type.

M7-21-0010-107 - 88 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2 Numeric. <state> Network operator state Numeric 0 Unknown 1 Available 2 Current 3 Forbidden <oper> Network operator String

Example(s) Automatic selection of network AT+COPS=0 OK AT+COPS? +COPS: 0,0,"Chunghwa Telecom LDM" OK

1. Automatic selection 2. Query status

List all available network and manual selection of network AT+COPS=? +COPS: (2,”Chunghwa Telecom LDM”,”CHTLDM”,”46692”),(3,”TWN GSM 1800”,”TCC”,”46697”),(3,”KGT-Online”,”KGT”,”46688”),(3,”Far EasTone”,”FET”,”46601”) OK AT+COPS=1,2,”46692” OK

1. List all network operators

2. Manual selection

M7-21-0010-107 - 89 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


4.4 +CLCK: Facility Lock

Execution command is used to lock, unlock or interrogate a ME or a network facility <fac>. Password is normally needed to do such actions. When querying the status of a network service (<mode>=2) the response line for ‘not active’ case (<status>=0) should be returned only if service is not active for any <class>. This command can be aborted when network facilities are set or interrogated. Call barring facilities are based on GSM supplementary services. The interaction between these and other commands based on other GSM supplementary services is described in the GSM standard. Test command returns facility values supported by the TA as compound value.

Syntax AT+CLCK=<facility>,<mode>[,<passwd>][,<class>] Response(s) If <mode> is not equal to 2 and command successful

OK If <mode> is equal to 2 and command successful

+CLCK: <status>[,<class>] OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CLCK=? Response(s) +CLCK: (list of supported <facility>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <facility> Network facility setting String “SC” SIM (lock SIM cards). PIN enabled (<mode>=1) / disabled (<mode>

= 0) “AO” BAOC (Barring All Outgoing Calls) “OI” BOIC (Barring Outgoing International Calls) “OX” BOIC-exHC (Barring Outgoing International Calls except to Home

Country) “AI” BAIC (Barring All Incoming Calls) “IR” BIC-Roam (Barring Incoming Calls when Roaming outside the home

country) “AB” All Barring services “AG” All outgoing barring services “AC” All incoming barring services “FD” SIM fixed dialing Numbers (FDN) memory feature (if PIN2

authentication has not been done during the current session, PIN2 is required as <passwd>)

“PS” SIM personalization

M7-21-0010-107 - 90 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


“PN” Network personalization of the ME “PU” Network subset personalization of the ME “PP” Service provider personalization of the ME “PC” Corporate personalization of the ME “PF” Personalization on first inserted SIM <mode> Lock mode Numeric 0 Unlock 1 Lock 2 Query status <status> Lock status Numeric 0 Not active 1 Active <passwd> Indicate PIN or network password String <class> Sum of some of the follow classes.

Value range: 1-255 (default 7) Numeric

1 Voice 2 Data 4 Fax 8 Short message 16 Data circuit sync 32 Data circuit async 64 Dedicated packet access 128 Dedicated PAD access

Example(s) PIN number control AT+CLCK=”SC”,1,”1234” OK AT+CLCK=”SC”,0,”1234” OK

1. Enable PIN number with “1234

2. Disable PIN number

M7-21-0010-107 - 91 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


4.5 +CPWD: Change password

Action command sets a new password for the facility lock function defined by command Facility Lock +CLCK.

Syntax AT+CPWD=<facility>,<oldpwd>,<newpwd> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CPWD=? Response(s) +CPWD: list of supported (<facility>,<pwdlength>)s

OK

Parameter(s) <facility> Network facility setting String “SC” SIM (lock SIM cards). PIN enabled (<mode>=1) / disabled (<mode>

= 0) “AO” BAOC (Barring All Outgoing Calls) “OI” BOIC (Barring Outgoing International Calls) “OX” BOIC-exHC (Barring Outgoing International Calls except to Home

Country) “AI” BAIC (Barring All Incoming Calls) “IR” BIC-Roam (Barring Incoming Calls when Roaming outside the home

country) “AB” All Barring services “AG” All outgoing barring services “AC” All incoming barring services “FD” SIM fixed dialing Numbers (FDN) memory feature (if PIN2

authentication has not been done during the current session, PIN2 is required as <passwd>)

“PS” SIM personalization “PN” Network personalization of the ME “PU” Network subset personalization of the ME “PP” Service provider personalization of the ME “PC” Corporate personalization of the ME “PF” Personalization on first inserted SIM <oldpwd> Old password specified for the facility String <newpwd> New password String <pwdlength> Maximum length of the password for the facility Numeric

M7-21-0010-107 - 92 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


4.6 +CLIP: Calling line identification presentation

This command enables a called subscriber to get the calling line identity (CLI) of the calling party when receiving a mobile terminated call.

Syntax AT+CLIP=[<n>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CLIP? Response(s) +CLIP: <n>,<m>

OK AT+CLIP=? Response(s) +CLIP: (list of supported <n>s)

OK Unsolicited Result Codes +CLIP: <number>,<type>,,[,<alpha>][,<CLI validity>]

Parameter(s) <n> Sets /shows the result code presentation status in

TA Numeric

0 Disables 1 Enables <m> Shows the subscriber CLIP service status in the

network Numeric

0 CLIP not provisioned 1 CLIP provisioned 2 Unknown (e.g. no network, etc.) <number> Pone number of calling address String <type> Type of address octet in integer format Numeric <alpha> String alphanumeric representation of <number>

corresponding to the entry found in phonebook String

<CLI validity> CLI validity Numeric 0 CLI valid 1 CLI has been withheld by the originator. 2 CLI is not available due to inter-working problems or limitations of

originating network. <number> shall be an empty string ("") and <type> value will not be significant.

M7-21-0010-107 - 93 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


Example(s) Activate CLI presentation AT+CLIP=1 OK AT+CLIP? +CLIP: 1, 1 RING +CLIP: “0920123456”,129,””,,”APPLE”,0

1. Enables CLI presentation 2. Query status 3. Incoming call 4. Shows the URC

(AT+CSCS=”IRA”)

M7-21-0010-107 - 94 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


4.7 +CLIR: Call line identification restriction

This command allows a calling subscriber to enable or disable the presentation of the CLI to the called party when a call is creating. Set command overrides the CLIR subscription (default is restricted or allowed) when temporary mode is provisioned as a default adjustment for all following outgoing calls. This adjustment can be revoked by using the opposite command. Read command gives the default adjustment for all outgoing calls (given in <n>), and also triggers an interrogation of the provision status of the CLIR service (given in <m>). Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value.

Syntax AT+CLIR=[<n>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CLIR? Response(s) +CLIR: <n>,<m>

OK AT+CLIR=? Response(s) +CRC: (list of supported <n>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <n> Sets the adjustment for outgoing call Numeric 0 Presentation indicator is used according to CLIR service. 1 CLIR invocation 2 CLIR suppression <m> Shows the subscriber CLIR service status in the

network Numeric

0 CLIR not provisioned 1 CLIR provisioned 2 Unknown (e.g. no network, etc.) 3 CLIR temporary mode presentation restricted 4 CLIR temporary mode presentation allowed

M7-21-0010-107 - 95 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


4.8 +COLP: Connection line identification presentation

This command enables a calling subscriber to get the connected line identity (COL) of the called party after setting up a mobile call has been created. The command enables or disables the presentation of the COL at the TE. It has no effect on the execution of the supplementary service COLR in the network. This command is useful for call forwarding of the connected line. When it is enabled (and called subscriber allows), +COLP: <number>, <type>[, <subaddr>, <satype>[, <alpha>]] intermediate result code is returned from TA to TE before any +CR or V.25ter response. It is manufacturer specific if this response is used base on normal voice call is established. Read command gives the status of <n>, and also triggers an interrogation of the provision status of the COLP service (given in <m>).

Syntax AT+COLP=[<n>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+COLP? Response(s) +COLP: <n>,<m>

OK AT+COLP=? Response(s) +COLP: (list of supported <n>s)

OK Unsolicited Result Codes +COLP: <number>,<type>[,<subaddr>,<satype>[,<alpha>]]


status in the TA Numeric

0 Disable 1 Enable <m> Parameter shows the subscriber COLP service status

in the network Numeric

0 COLP not provisioned 1 COLP provisioned 2 Unknown (e.g. no network, etc.) <number> String phone number of connected address in

format specified by <type> String

<type> Type of address octet in integer format Numeric <subaddr> Subaddress of format specified by <satype> String

M7-21-0010-107 - 96 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


<satype> Type of subaddress octet in integer format Numeric <alpha> Optional alphanumeric string String

M7-21-0010-107 - 97 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


4.9 +CCUG: Closed user group

This command allows control of the Closed User Group supplementary service. Set command enables the served subscriber to select a CUG index to suppress the Outgoing Access (OA), and to suppress the preferential CUG.

Syntax AT+CCUG=[[<n>][,<index>][,<info>]] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CCUG? Response(s) +CCUG: <n>,<index>,<info>

OK AT+CCUG=? Response(s) +CCUG: (list of supported <n>s),(range of supported

<index>s),(range of supported <info>s) OK

Parameter(s) <n> Explicit CUG invocation options Numeric 0 Deactivate explicit CUG invocation 1 Activate explicit CUG invocation <index> CUG index Numeric 0-9 explicit selection of CUG index 10 No index (preferred CUG taken from subscriber data. <info> State of the call Numeric 0 No information 1 Suppress OA 2 Suppress preferential CUG 3 Suppress OA and preferential CUG

M7-21-0010-107 - 98 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


4.10 +CCFC: Call forwarding service

This command allows control of the call forwarding supplementary service. Registration, erasure, activation, deactivation, and status query are supported.

Syntax AT+CCFC =<reason>,<mode>[,<number>[,<type>[,<class>[,<subaddr>[, <satype>[,<time>]]]]]] Response(s) If <mode> is not equal to 2 and command successful

OK If <mode> is equal to 2, <reason> is not equal to 2 and command successful

+CCFC: <status>,<class>[,<number>,<type>] OK

If <mode> is equal to 2, <reason> is equal to 2 and command successful +CCFC: <status>,<class>[,<number>,<type>,<time>]


AT+CCFC=? Response(s) +CCFC: (list of supported <reason>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <reason> Reason for call forwarding Numeric 0 Unconditional 1 Mobile busy 2 No reply 3 Not reachable 4 All call forwarding (set reason 0,1,2,3 simultaneously) 5 All conditional call forwarding (set reason 0,1,2,3 simultaneously) <mode> Network operation to be performed for

Supplementary service "call forwarding" Numeric

0 Disable 1 Enable 2 Query Status 3 Registration 4 Erasure <class> Sum of bearer service code Numeric 1 Voice (telephony) 2 Data (refers to all bearer services; with <mode>=2 this may refer only

to some bearer service if TA does not support values 16,32,64 and 128)

4 Fax (facsimile services) 8 Short message service 16 Data circuit sync 32 Data circuit async

M7-21-0010-107 - 99 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


64 Dedicated packet access 128 Dedicated PAD access <number> String phone number of connected address in

format specified by <type> String

<type> Type of address octet in integer format Numeric <subaddr> Subaddress of format specified by <satype> String <satype> Type of subaddress octet in integer format Numeric <time> Time to wait before call is forwarded Numeric 1-30 Range from 1 second to 30 seconds, Default value is 20 <status> Call Forwarding status Numeric 0 Not activate 1 Activate

Example(s) Registration AT+CCFC=0,3,” 0911222333” OK

Before enable, disable, and erasure, you should register the SS service. Register unconditional forwarding to “0911222333” and activated the service. It doesn’t means that the SS service is registered successfully. You should query the status to confirm the result.

Query AT+CCFC=0,2 +CCFC: 1,1,"886911222333",145 OK AT+CCFC=4,2 ERROR AT+CCFC=5,2 ERROR

Query reason 4,5 is not supported

Erasure AT+CCFC=0,4 OK AT+CCFC=0,2 +CCFC: 0,7 OK

1. Erase call forwarding service of all classes.

M7-21-0010-107 - 100 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


4.11 +CCWA: Call waiting service

This command allows control of the Call Waiting supplementary service. Activation, deactivation and status query are supported. When querying the status of a network service (<mode>=2) the response line for ‘not active’ case (<status>=0) should be returned only if services are not active for any <class>. Parameter <n> is used to disable/enable the presentation of an unsolicited result code +CCWA: <number>, <type>, <class>,[<alpha>][,<CLI validity>] to the TE when call waiting service is enabled.

Syntax AT+CCWA=[<n>[,<mode>[,<class>]]] Response(s) If <mode> is not equal to 2 and command successful

OK If <mode> is equal to 2 and command successful

+CCWA: <status>,<class> OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CCWA? Response(s) +CCWA: <n>

OK AT+CCWA=? Response(s) +CCWA: (list of supported <n>s)

OK Unsolicited Result Codes +CCWA: <number>,<type>,<class>,<CLI validity>

Parameter(s) <n> Sets/shows the unsolicited result code presentation

status in the TA Numeric

0 Disable 1 Enable <mode> Network operation to be performed for

Supplementary service call waiting Numeric

0 Disable 1 Enable 2 Query status <status> CCWA status Numeric 0 Not active 1 Active <class> Sum of integers each representing a class of

information Numeric

1 Voice 2 Data (refers to all bearer services; with <mode>=2 this may refer only

M7-21-0010-107 - 101 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


to some bearer service if TA does not support values 16,32,64 and 128)

4 Fax (facsimile services) 8 Short message service 16 Data circuit sync 32 Data circuit async 64 Dedicated packet access 128 Dedicated PAD access <number> Phone number of calling address in format specified

by <type> String

<type> Type of address octet in integer format Numeric <CLI validity> CLI validity Numeric 0 CLI valid 1 CLI has been withheld by the originator. 2 CLI is not available due to inter-working problems or limitations of

originating network.

Example(s) Query status AT+CCWA=1,2 +CCWA: 1,1 OK

Class 1 is activated.

Deactivate call waiting service of class 1 AT+CCWA=1,0,1 OK AT+CCWA=1,2 +CCWA: 0,7 OK

Activate call waiting service of class 1 AT+CCWA=1,1,1 OK AT+CCWA=1,2 +CCWA: 1,1 OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 102 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


4.12 +CHLD: Call related supplementary services

This command allows the control of the following call related services: A call can be temporarily disconnected from the ME but the connection is

retained by the network; Multiparty conversation (conference calls); The served subscriber who has two calls (one held and the other either active or

alerting) can connect to other parties and release the served subscriber’s own connection.

Calls can be put on hold, recovered, released, added to conversation, and transferred similarly. It is recommended (although optional) that test command returns a list of operations which are supported. The call number required by some operations shall be denoted by "x" (e.g. +CHLD: (0,1,1x,2,2x,3)).

Syntax AT+CHLD=[<n>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CHLD=? Response(s) +CHLD: (list of supported <n>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <n> Extended format mode Numeric 0 Release all held calls or send UDUB for a waiting call. 1 Release all active calls and accept the other held or waiting calls. 1x Release a specified active call x. 2 Place all active calls on hold and accept the other waiting or held calls. 2x Place all active calls on hold except call x with which communication

shall be supported. 3 Adds held calls to the conversation. 4 Connects the two calls and disconnects the subscriber from both calls.

M7-21-0010-107 - 103 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


4.13 +CUSD: Unstructured supplementary service data

This command allows control of the Unstructured Supplementary Service Data (USSD). Both network and mobile initiated operations are supported. Parameter <n> is used to disable/enable the presentation of an unsolicited result code (USSD response from the network, or network initiated operation) +CUSD: <m>[, <str>, <dcs>] to the TE. In addition, value <n>=2 is used to cancel an ongoing USSD session. When <str> is provided, a mobile initiated USSD-string or a response USSD-string to a network initiated operation is sent to the network. The response USSD-string from the network is returned in a subsequent unsolicited +CUSD result code. Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value.

Syntax AT+CUSD=[<n>[,<str>[,<dcs>]]] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CUSD? Response(s) +CUSD: <n>

OK AT+CUSD=? Response(s) +CUSD: (list of supported <n>s)

OK Unsolicited Result Codes +CUSD: <m>[,<str>[,<dcs>]]

Parameter(s) <n> Result code presentation mode Numeric 0 Disable the result code presentation in the TA 1 Enable the result code presentation in the TA 2 Cancel session (not applicable to read command response) <str> USSD-string(when <str> parameter is not given,

network is not interrogated) String

<dcs> Cell Broadcast Data Coding Scheme in integer format

Numeric

<m> Status Numeric 0 No further user action required. 1 Further user action required. 2 USSD terminated by network. 3 Other local client has responded. 4 Operation not supported. 5 Network time out.

M7-21-0010-107 - 104 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


4.14 +CAOC: Advice of charge

This refers to Advice of Charge supplementary service that enables subscriber to get information about the cost of calls. With <mode>=0, the execute command returns the current call meter value from the ME. The command is also possible to enable an unsolicited event reporting of the CCM information. The unsolicited result code +CCCM: <ccm> is sent every (no more than) 10 seconds when the CCM value is changed. Deactivation of the unsolicited event reporting is made with the same command. The Read command indicates whether the unsolicited reporting is activated or not. Read command is available when the unsolicited result code is supported.

Syntax AT+CAOC=[<mode>] Response(s) [+CAOC: <ccm>]


AT+CAOC? Response(s) +CAOC: <mode>

OK AT+CAOC=? Response(s) +CAOC: (list of supported <mode>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <mode> Setting mode Numeric 0 Query CCM value 1 Deactivate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value 2 Activate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value <ccm> Three bytes of the current call meter value in

hexadecimal format. String

M7-21-0010-107 - 105 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


4.15 +CSSN: Supplementary service notifications

This command refers to supplementary service related network initiated notifications. The set command enables/disables the presentation of notification result codes from TA to TE. When <n>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received after a mobile call setup is created, intermediate result code +CSSI: <code1>[,<index>] is sent to TE before any other MO call setup result codes which is described in related document of V.25ter. When several different <code1>s are received from the network, each of them shall have its own +CSSI result code. When <m>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received during a mobile terminated call setup or during a call, or when a forward check supplementary service notification is received, unsolicited result code +CSSU: <code2>[,<index>[,<number>,<type>]]] is sent to TE. In case of MT call setup, result code is sent after every +CLIP result code (refer command "Calling line identification presentation +CLIP") and when several different <code2>s are received from the network, each of them shall have its own +CSSU result code. Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value.

Syntax AT+CSSN=[<n>[,<m>]] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CSSN? Response(s) +CSSN: <n>,<m>

OK AT+CSSN=? Response(s) +CSSN: (list of supported <n>s), (list of supported <m>s)

OK Unsolicited Result Codes +CSSI: <code1>[,<index>] +CSSU: <code2>[,<index>[,<number>[,<type>]]]

Parameter(s) <n> Parameter sets/shows the +CSSI result code

presentation status Numeric

0 Disable 1 Enable <m> Parameter sets/shows the +CSSU result code Numeric

M7-21-0010-107 - 106 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


presentation status 0 Disable 1 Enable <code1> +CSSI unsolicited result code content Numeric 0 Unconditional call forwarding is active 1 Some of the conditional call forwarding are active 2 Call has been forwarded 3 Call is waiting 4 This is a CUG call 5 Outgoing calls are barred 6 Incoming calls are barred 7 CLIR suppression rejected 8 Call has been deflected <index> CUG index Numeric 0-9 explicit selection of CUG index 10 No index (preferred CUG taken from subscriber data. <code2> +CSSU unsolicited result code content Numeric 0 This is a forwarded call 1 This is a CUG call 2 Call has been put on hold 3 Call has been retrieved 4 Multiparty call entered 5 Call on hold has been released 6 Forward check SS message received 7 Call is being connected with the remote party in alerting state in

explicit call transfer operation 8 Call has been connected with the other remote party I explicit call

transfer operation 9 This is a deflected call 10 Additional incoming call forwarded <number> Phone number String <type> Type of address octet Numeric

Example(s) Enables service notifications AT+CSSN=1,1 OK atd0937135753; OK +CSSI: 1 NO CARRIER OK

1. Enable both service notifications

2. Call to one phone

number which is “call forward” to another phone

3. CSSI URC information

M7-21-0010-107 - 107 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


4.16 +CPOL: Preferred PLMN list

This command is used to edit the PLMN selector with Access Technology lists in the SIM card or active application in the UICC(GSM or USIM). Execute command writes an entry in the SIM/USIM list of preferred PLMNs previously selected by the command +CPLS. If no list has been previously selected, users will control PLMN selector with Access Technology, EFOPLMNWACT, which is the default one considered. If <index> is provided but <oper> is not, entry is deleted. On the other hand, <oper> is put into next free location if <oper> is provided without <index>. If only <format> is provided, the format of the <oper> in the read command will be changed. The Access Technology selection parameters makes Read command return all used entries from the SIM/USIM list of preferred PLMNs previously selected by the command +CPLS with the Access Technologies for each PLMN in the list. Note: It is recommend to add a preferred PLMN with numeric format. There is an internal list which stores all PLMNs’ long names, short names and numeric names in the module. AT+COPN is able to display the list. The numeric information is the MCC and MNC of the PLMN. Once long/short format is chose for inserting a preferred PLMN that does not exist in the internal list, the module will reject the command because of it’s failing to get the MCC and MNC of the PLMN. Test command returns the whole index range supported by the SIM.

Syntax AT+CPOL=[<index>][,<format>[,<oper>]] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CPOL? Response(s) +CPOL: <index>,<format>,<oper>

[+CPOL:<index>,<format>,<oper>] [...] OK

AT+CPOL=? Response(s) +CPOL: (list of supported <index>s),(list of supported <format>s)

Parameter(s)

M7-21-0010-107 - 108 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


<index> The order number of operator in the SIM/USIM preferred operator list. (range depended on SIM)

Numeric

<format> Format of network operator representation. Numeric 0 Long format alphanumeric <oper> 1 Short format alphanumeric <oper> 2 Numeric <oper> <oper> Operator name String

Example(s) Preferred PLMN list AT+CPOL=? +CPOL: (1-8), (0-2) OK AT+CPOL? +CPOL:1,2,”46697” OK

1. Get parameter. 2. Query current value.

M7-21-0010-107 - 109 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


4.17 +CLCC: List current calls

To return a list of current calls of ME. If command succeeds but no calls are available, no information response is sent to TE.

Syntax AT+CLCC Response(s) [+CLCC: <id>, <dir>, <state>, <mode>, <mpty>[, <number>,

<type>[, <alpha>]]] [+CLCC: <id>, <dir>, <state>, <mode>, <mpty>[, <number>, <type>[, <alpha>]]] […] OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CLCC=? Response(s) OK

Parameter(s) <id> Call identification number Numeric <dir> Call direction Numeric 0 Mobile originated (MO) call 1 Mobile terminated (MT) call <state> state of the call Numeric 0 Active 1 Held 2 Dialing (MO call) 3 Alerting (MO call) 4 Incoming (MT call) 5 Waiting (MT call) <mode> bearer/teleservice Numeric 0 Voice 1 Data 2 Fax 3 Voice followed by data, voice mode 4 Alternating voice/data, voice mode 5 Alternating voice/fax, voice mode 6 Voice followed by data, data mode 7 Alternating voice/data, data mode 8 Alternating voice/fax, fax mode 9 Unknown <mpty> Multiparty (conference) call parties Numeric 0 Call is not one of multiparty (conference) call parties 1 Call is one of multiparty (conference) call parties

M7-21-0010-107 - 110 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


<number> Phone number in format specified by <type> String <type> Type of address octet Numeric 129 Dialing string without international access code “+”. 145 Dialing string includes international access code character “+”. <alpha> Alphanumeric representation of <number>

corresponding to the entry found in phonebook; used character set should be the one selected with command +CSCS

String

Example(s) List current calls ATD0952123456; OK AT+CLCC +CLCC: 1,0,0,0,0,"0952123456",129,"aa"

1. Dial number. 2. List current call.

M7-21-0010-107 - 111 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


4.18 +COPN: Read operator names

Execute command returns the list of operators’ names from the ME. Each operator code<numeric> that has an alphanumeric equivalent <alpha> in the ME memory shall be returned.

Syntax AT+COPN Response(s) +COPN: <numeric>, <alpha>

[+COPN: <numeric>, <alpha>] […] OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+COPN=? Response(s) OK

Parameter(s) <numeric> Operator in numeric format(see +COPS) String <alpha> Operator in long alphanumeric format(see +COPS) String

Example(s) Read operator names AT+COPN +COPN: "00131","Test Network" +COPN: "546559","Test Net 222" +COPN: "56231","A1" +COPN: "56263","A max." …… OK

1. Get operator’s name.

M7-21-0010-107 - 112 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


4.19 $GNC: Get neighbor cells

This command is used to get the identity of the neighbor cells. The maximum values of neighbor cells is up to 6.

Syntax AT$GNC? Response(s) list of possible <ncid>s

OK

Parameter(s) <ncid> Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format String

Example(s) Get Neighbor Cells AT$GNC? 4ecc,3c7d,959f,763a,8a9d,0 OK

1. Get cell information. 2. Query current value.

M7-21-0010-107 - 113 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


4.20 %BAND: Dynamic multiband

This command is used to manage which radio bands are scanned.

Syntax AT%BAND=<mode>[,<band>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT%BAND? Response(s) %BAND: <mode>[,<band>]

OK AT%BAND =? Response(s) %BAND: (list of supported <mode>s), (list of supported <band>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <mode> Set the radio band switch mode Numeric 0 Automatic 1 Manual <band> Is a sum of integers each representing a band Numeric 1 GSM 900 2 DCS 1800 4 PCS 1900 8 E-GSM 16 GSM 850

Example(s) Define PDP context AT%BAND=1,15 set MS to scan 900/1800/1900. For modules-based

products, MS will re-register to the network automatically.

M7-21-0010-107 - 114 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


4.21 %CREG: Network extended registration status

This command is similar to +CREG but in addition it returns the parameter <gprs_ind>, which is used to determine whether a GPRS connection is available and GPRS can be started or not.

Syntax AT%CREG=[<n>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT%CREG? Response(s) %CREG: <n>,<stat>,[<lac>],[<ci>],<gprs_ind>

OK AT%CREG=? Response(s) %CREG: (list of supported <n>s)

OK Unsolicited Result Codes +CREG: <n>,<stat>,[<lac>],[<ci>],<gprs_ind>

Parameter(s) <n> Unsolicited Result Codes presentation mode Numeric 0 Disable network registration unsolicited result code. 1 Enable network registration unsolicited result code.

+CREG: <stat>,,,<gprs_ind> 2 Enable network registration and location information unsolicited result

code. +CREG: <stat>,[<lac>],[<ci>],<gprs_ind>

<stat> Registration status Numeric 0 Not registered, ME is not currently searching a new operator to

register to (NO SERVICE) 1 Registered, home network 2 Limiting Service: not registered but ME is currently searching a new

operator to register to 3 Limiting Service: registration denied 4 Unknown 5 Registered, roaming <lac> Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format. String <ci> Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format. String <gprs_ind> GPRS Registration indicator Numeric 0 GPRS is not supported within the cell. 1 GPRS is supported in limited service. 2 GPRS is supported within the cell. 3 Unknown whether GPRS is supported within the cell.

M7-21-0010-107 - 115 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5 Mobile Equipment Control and Status Commands

5.1 +CPAS: Phone activity status

Execution command returns the activity status <pas> of the ME. It can be used to interrogate the ME before requesting action from the phone.

Syntax AT+CPAS Response(s) +CPAS: <pas>


AT+CPAS=? Response(s) +CPAS: (list of supported <pas>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <pas> Phone activity status Numeric 0 Ready. 1 Unavailable. 2 Unknown. 3 Ringing. 4 Call in progress. 5 Asleep.

Example(s) Test phone activity status AT+CPAS=? +CPAS: (0-5) OK

Query phone activity status AT+CPAS +CPAS: 0 OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 116 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.2 +CFUN: Set phone functionality

Set command selects the level of functionality <fun> in the ME. Level “full functionality” is where the highest level of power is drawn; on the other hand, level “Minimum functionality” is where minimum power is drawn. Level of functionality between these may also be specified by manufacturers. When it is supported by manufacturers, ME resetting with <rst> parameter may be utilized.

Syntax AT+CFUN=<fun>[,<rst>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CFUN? Response(s) +CFUN: <fun>

OK AT+CFUN=? Response(s) +CFUN: (list of supported <fun>s),(list of supported <rst>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <fun> Numeric 0 Minimum functionality. 1 Full functionality. 4 Disable phone both transmit and receive RF circuits. <rst> Numeric 0 Do not reset the ME before setting it to <fun> power level. 1 ME resets and restarts to full functionality.

M7-21-0010-107 - 117 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.3 $SRN: Facility status notification

This command is used to notify the ready state. Set command controls the presentation of an URC code $SRN: 1 when <n>=1.

Syntax AT$SRN=<n> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT$SRN? Response(s) $SRN: <n>

OK AT$SRN =? Response(s) $SRN: (list of supported <n>s)

OK Unsolicited Result Codes $SRN: <stat>

Parameter(s) <fun> Numeric 0 Disable facility status unsolicited result code. 1 Enable facility status unsolicited result code. <stat> Numeric 1 Facility status is ready.

Example(s) Enable facility status unsolicited result code AT$SRN=1 OK AT+CFUN=1 OK (When the SMS and Phb are ready) $SRN: 1

1. Enable 2. Active the SIM module 3. Facility status is ready

M25A M25 M27

M7-21-0010-107 - 118 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.4 +CPIN: Enter PIN

Set command sends the MS a password that is necessary before it can be operated for only SIM PIN. If no PIN request is pending, no action is taken. If SIM is useless or SIM is not inserted, an error message +CME ERROR is returned to the TE. Read command returns an alphanumeric string indicating whether some password is required or not.

Syntax AT+CPIN=<pin>[,<newpin>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CPIN? Response(s) +CPIN: <code>


Parameter(s) <pin> A password, usually is PIN String <newpin> A new password when requested code is PUK String <code> Requested SIM PIN authentication code String “READY” ME is not pending for any password. “SIM PIN” ME is waiting SIM PIN to be given. “SIM PIN2” ME is waiting SIM PIN2 to be given (this <code> is recommended to be

returned only when the last executed command resulted in PIN2 authentication failure (i.e. +CME ERROR: 17); if PIN2 is not entered right after the failure, it is recommended that ME does not block it operation).

“SIM PUK” ME is waiting SIM PUK(=Pin Unblocking Key) to be given after three PIN fail.

“SIM PUK2” ME is waiting SIM PUK2 to be given (this <code> is recommended to be returned only when the last executed command resulted in PUK2 authentication failure (i.e. +CME ERROR: 18); if PUK2 and new PIN2are not entered right after the failure, it is recommended that ME does not block it operation).

Example(s) Power on (1) (CHV1 is disabled, SIM is ready) AT+CPIN? +CPIN: READY

Power on (1) (SIM not inserted) AT+CMEE=2 OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 119 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


AT+CPIN? +CME ERROR: SIM not inserted

M7-21-0010-107 - 120 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.5 +CSQ: Signal quality

Execution command returns received signal strength indication <rssi> and channel bit error rate <ber> from the MS. Test command returns values supported by the MS as compound values. Only support continuous unsolicited response.

Syntax AT+CSQ Response(s) +CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>


AT+CSQ=? Response(s) +CSQ: (list of supported <rssi>s), (list of supported <ber>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <rssi> RSSI value, signal strength Numeric 0 -113dBm or less 1 -111dBm 2-30 -109dBm ~ -53dBm 31 -51dBm or greater 99 Not known or not detectable. <ber> Bit error rate Numeric 0-7 RXQUAL values in the table in GSM 05.08. 99 Unknown or not detectable.

Example(s) Query current signal quality AT+CSQ +CSQ: 31,99 OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 121 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.6 +CRSM: Restricted SIM access

By using this command instead of Generic SIM Access +CSIM TE application will be easier but have more limitation to access the SIM database. Set command transmits the SIM <command> and its required parameters to ME. ME internally handles all SIM-ME interface locking and file selection routines. As response to the command, ME sends the actual SIM information parameters and response data. ME error result code +CME ERROR may be returned when the command cannot be passed to the SIM; however, failure in the execution of the command in the SIM is reported in <sw1> and <sw2> parameters. It is coordination that commands used for requesting SIM access externally and those issued by GSM/UMTS application inside the ME are implement-dependent. However the TE should be aware of the precedence from GSM/UMTS application commands to TE commands.

Syntax AT+CRSM=<command>[,<fileid>[,<P1>,<P2>,<P3>[,<data>]]] Response(s) +CRSM:<sw1>,<sw2>[,<response>]


Parameter(s) <command> command passed on by the ME to the SIM Numeric 176 READ BINARY 178 READ RECORD 192 GET RESPONSE 214 UPDATE BINARY 220 UPDATE RECORD 242 STATUS <fileid> Identifier of an elementary data file on SIM Numeric <P1> Parameter pass to SIM, according to GSM 11.11 Numeric 0-255 <P2> Parameter pass to SIM, according to GSM 11.11 Numeric 0-255 <P3> Parameter pass to SIM, according to GSM 11.11 Numeric 0-255 <data> Information to be written into the SIM String <sw1> Returned information from SIM for command execution Numeric 0-255 <sw2> Returned information from SIM for command execution Numeric 0-255

M7-21-0010-107 - 122 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


<response> Response data from SIM for command execution String

Example(s) AT+CRSM=192,12258,0,0,255 +CRSM: 103,15 OK

Get SIM Card Identification number (ICCID) AT+CRSM=176,12258,0,0,10 +CRSM: 144,0,98889612040053576639 OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 123 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.7 +CLVL: Loudspeaker volume level

1. Set command is used to select the volume of the internal loudspeaker of the ME. 2. Read command reads the setting value of loudspeaker volume.

3. Test command returns supported values as compound value.

Syntax AT+CLVL= <level > Response(s) +CME ERROR: <err>

AT+CLVL? Response(s) +CLVL: <level >

OK AT+CLVL=? Response(s) +CLVL: (list of supported <level >)

OK

Parameter(s) <level> Numeric 0-255 0 for lowest gain, 255 for highest gain

Example(s) Query current status AT+CLVL? +CLVL: 175 OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 124 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.8 +CMUT: Mute

This command is used to enable and disable the uplink voice muting during a voice call.

Syntax AT+CMUT=<n> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CMUT? Response(s) +CMUT: <n>

OK AT+CMUT=? Response(s) +CMUT: (list of supported <n >s)

OK

Parameter(s) <n> Must status Numeric 0 MUTE OFF 1 MUTE ON

M7-21-0010-107 - 125 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.9 +CACM: Accumulated call meter

Set command resets the Advice of Charge related accumulated call meter value in SIM card or in the active application in the UICC file EFACM. ACM contains the total number of home units for both the current and preceding calls. SIM PIN2 is usually required to reset the value.

Syntax AT+CACM=<passwd> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CACM? Response(s) +CACM: <acm>

OK

Parameter(s) <passwd> SIM PIN2 String <acm> Accumulated call meter value String

Example(s) AT+CACM? +CACM: “000000” OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 126 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.10 +CAMM: Accumulated call meter maximum

Set command sets the Advice of Charge related accumulated call meter maximum value in SIM card or in the active application in the UICC file EFACMmax. ACMmax contains the maximum number of home units allowed to be consumed by the subscriber.

Syntax AT+CAMM =<passwd> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CAMM? Response(s) +CAMM: <acmmax>

OK

Parameter(s) <acmmax> Accumulated call meter maximum value String <passwd> SIM PIN2 String

Example(s) Query CAMM AT+CAMM? +CAMM: “000000” OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 127 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.11 +CPUC: Price per unit and currency table

Set command sets the parameters of Advice of Charge related price per unit and currency table in SIM card or in the active application in the UICC file EFPUCT.PUCT information can be used to convert the home units into currency units. SIM PIN2 is usually required to set the parameters.

Syntax AT+CPUC=<currency>,<ppu>[,<passed>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CPUC? Response(s) +CPUC: <currency>,<ppu>

OK

Parameter(s) <currency> Three character currency code String <ppu> Price per unit String

Example(s) Query CPUC AT+CPUC? +CPUC: “”,”” OK

Set price per unit and currency element AT+CPUC=”NT”,”5.00” +CME ERROR: SIM PIN2 required

M7-21-0010-107 - 128 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.12 +CCWE: Call Meter maximum event

Shortly before the ACM (Accumulated Call Meter) maximum value is reached, an unsolicited result code +CCWV will be sent if it is enabled by this command. The warning is issued approximately in the last 30 seconds call time. Warning is also issued if starting a call before the last 30 seconds call time. If setting is failed in an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned. Read command returns the current setting. Test command returns supported settings.

Syntax AT+CCWE=<mode> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CCWE? Response(s) +CCWE: <mode>

OK AT+CCWE=? +CCWE: (list of supported <mode>s)

OK Unsolicited Result Codes +CCWE<1> enables the warning event. When ACM approaches the ACM

maximum value, event +CCWV will send by TE to ME. +CCWV

After receiving this event, TE should notify user through proper way.

Parameter(s) <mode> Phone activity status Numeric 0 Disable the call meter warning event. 1 Enable the call meter warning event.

Example(s) Set call meter maximum event on AT+CCWE=1 OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 129 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.13 +CSVM: Set Voice Mail Number

The number for the voice mail server is set through this command. The parameters <number> and <type> can be ignored if the parameter <mode> is set to 0. If setting is failed, an ME error +CME ERROR: <err> is returned. Read command returns the currently selected voice mail number and the status (i.e. enabled/disabled). Test command returns supported <mode>s and <type>s.

Syntax AT+CSVM=<mode>[,<number>[,<type>]] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CSVM? Response(s) +CSVM:<mode>,<number>,<type>

OK AT+CSVM=? +CSVM: (list of supported <mode>s), (list of supported <type>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <mode> Numeric 0 Disable the voice mail number. 1 Enable the voice mail number. <number> Character string <0..9,+>, the maximum length of

phone number is 40 digits (include prefix ‘+’ if exists) String

<type> Type of address octet Numeric 129 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international unknown. 145 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number. 161 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number. 128-255 Other values refer TS 24.008 section 10.5.4.7.

Example(s) Test command AT+CSVM=? +CSVM: (0,1),(129,145,161) OK

Query command AT+CSVM? +CSVM: 1,"188",129 OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 130 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.14 +CLAC: List all available AT commands

Execution command causes the ME to return one or more lines of AT Commands. Note: This command only returns the AT commands that are available for the user.

Syntax AT+CLAC Response(s) <AT Command1>

<AT Command2> …


Example(s) List all available commands AT+CLAC AT+CACM AT+CAMM AT+CAOC …… OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 131 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.15 %PVRF: Get PIN1, PIN2, PUK1, PUK2 remaining number

This command is responsible for verifying or checking the status of the PIN.

Syntax AT%PVRF=<type>,<old pin>,<new pin> Response(s) OK

ERROR AT% PVRF? Response(s) %PVRF:<pn1Cnt>,<pn2Cnt>,<pk1Cnt>,<pk2Cnt>,<ps1>,<ps2>

OK

Parameter(s) <type> Numeric 0 PVRF_TYPE_Pin1 1 PVRF_TYPE_Pin2 2 PVRF_TYPE_Puk1 3 PVRF_TYPE_Puk2 <pn1Cnt> Reattempt counter of PIN 1 Numeric <pn2Cnt> Reattempt counter of PIN 2 Numeric <pk1Cnt> Reattempt counter of PUK 1 Numeric <pk2Cnt> Reattempt counter of PUK 2 Numeric <ps1> PIN 1 status Numeric <ps2> PIN 2 status Numeric

M7-21-0010-107 - 132 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.16 +VTS: DTMF and tone generation

This command allows the transmission of DTMF tones and arbitrary tones (see note). These tones may be used (for example) when announcing the start of a recording period. The command is write only. In this profile of commands, this command does not operate in data or fax modes of operation (+FCLASS=0,1,2-7). Note: D is used only for dialing.

Syntax AT+VTS=<tone> Response(s) OK

ERROR AT+VTS=? Response(s) (list of supported <tone>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <tone> A single ASCII character in the set 0-9, #,*,A-D. Numeric 0-9, #,*,A-D

Example(s) Test command AT+VTS=? +VTS: (0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,A,B,C,D,#,*) OK

Query command AT+VTS=1 OK AT+VTS=9 OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 133 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.17 +WDTMF: Play DTMF tone

This specific command allows a DTMF tone to be played on the current speaker. DTMF, gain and duration can be set. This command is only used to play a DTMF tone. To send a DTMF over the GSM network, use the +VTS command.

Syntax AT+WDTMF=<isEnable>[,<dtmf>,<gain>,<duration>] Response(s) OK

ERROR

Parameter(s)

<isEnable> Numeric 0 Stop playing 1 Play a DTMF tone <dtmf> This parameter sets the DTMF to play in

{0-9,*,#,A,B,C,D}(mandatory if <mode>=1) Numeric

<gain> This parameter sets tone gain. Numeric 0-48 The default value is 9. <duration> This parameter sets the tone duration (unit of 100

ms). Numeric

0-50 When this parameter is 0 (default value), the duration is infinite, and the DTMF tone can be stopped by AT+WDTMF=0.

M7-21-0010-107 - 134 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.18 +VGR: Receive gain selection

This command is used to tune the receive gain of microphone. Syntax

AT+VGR=<n> Response(s) OK

ERROR AT+VGR? Response(s) <n>

OK ERROR

AT+VGR=? Response(s) (list of supported <n>s)

OK

Parameter(s)

<n> Receive gain Numeric 1 -6db 2 -5db 3 -4db 4 -3db 5 -2db 6 -1db 7 -0db 8 +1db 9 +2db 10 +3db 11 +4db 12 +5db 13 +6db

M7-21-0010-107 - 135 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.19 +VGT: Transmit gain selection

This command is used to tune the receive gain of microphone.

Syntax AT+VGT=<n> Response(s) OK

ERROR AT+VGT? Response(s) <n>

OK ERROR

AT+VGT=? Response(s) (list of supported <n>s)

OK

Parameter(s)

<n> Receive gain Numeric 1 -12db 2 -11db 3 -10db 4 -9db 5 -8db 6 -7db 7 -6db 8 -5db 9 -4db 10 -3db 11 -2db 12 -1db 13 0db 14 +1db 15 +2db 16 +3db 17 +4db 18 +5db 19 +6db 20 +7db 21 +8db 22 +9db 23 +10db 24 +11db 25 +12db

M7-21-0010-107 - 136 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.20 $POWEROFF: Power off

This command is used to power off the module. After this command, the user has to press the power key to power on the module.

Syntax AT$POWEROFF Response(s) OK

ERROR

Example(s) Power off command AT$POWEROFF OK OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 137 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.21 $CSQ: Periodic Signal Quality Report

This command is used to start or stop periodic signal quality report. Syntax

AT$CSQ=<mode>[,<cycle>] Response(s) OK

$CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>

ERROR AT$CSQ=? Response(s) $CSQ: (list of supported <mode>), (list of supported <cycle>)

OK AT$CSQ? Response(s) $CSQ: <mode>[,<cycle>]

OK

Parameter(s) <mode> Numeric 0 STOP 1 START <cycle> Numeric 1-255 1-255 (seconds), default is 5 (seconds) <rssi> Received signal strength indication Numeric 0 -113dBm or less 1 -111dBm 2…30 -709dBm~-53dBm 31 -51dBm or greater 99 Unknown or not detectable <ber> Channel bit error rate Numeric 99 Unknown or not detectable

Example(s) Start periodic signal quality report AT$CSQ=1,10 OK $CSQ: 29, 99 /* After 10 seconds */ $CSQ: 29, 99 /* After 10 seconds */

Start periodic signal quality report for every 10 seconds

Stop periodic signal quality report AT$CSQ=0 OK

Stop periodic signal quality report

M7-21-0010-107 - 138 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.22 $SP: Control audio path

This command is used to control audio path. There are several combinations of the audio input and output device. The write command is available only in audio modes 1 to 5.

Syntax AT$SP=<path> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT$SP? Response(s) $SP: <path>

OK AT$SP=? (list of supported <path>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <path> Supported audio path Numeric 0 Handheld path. 1 Handfree path. 2 Digital path.

Example(s) Set audio path AT$SP=0 OK AT$SP=1 OK

1. Set to handheld audio path. 2. Set to handfree audio path.

M7-21-0010-107 - 139 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.23 $SG: Control audio gain

This command is used to control audio gain. Note that this command has to be used after audio path is configured by AT$SP. The write command is available only in audio modes 1 to 5.

Syntax AT$SG=<channel>,<gain> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT$SG? Response(s) $SG: <mic gain>,<spk_fine gain>,<spk_caurse gain>,<sidetone

gain> OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT$SG=? $SG: (0-3),(0-9)

OK

Parameter(s) <channel> The target to set gain value Numeric 0 Microphone channel. 1 Speaker fine channel. 2 Speaker course channel. 3 Sidetone channel. <gain> The gain value to be set Numeric 0 Mute. 1-9 Possible gain value.

Mic Gain Spk fine Gain Spk course Gain Sidetone Gain

Value Gain(dB) Value Gain(dB) Value Gain(dB) Value Gain(dB) 0 (Mute) 0 N/A 0 (Mute) 0 (Mute) 1 -12 1 -6 1 -24(1) 1 -23 2 -9 2 -5 2 -18(50) 2 -20 3 -6 3 -4 3 -12(100) 3 -17 4 -3 4 -2 4 -6(150) 4 -14 5 0 5 0 5 0(200) 5 -11 6 3 6 2 6 0(200) 6 -8 7 6 7 4 7 0(200) 7 -5 8 9 8 5 8 0(200) 8 -2 9 12 9 6 9 0(200) 9 1

M7-21-0010-107 - 140 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


Example(s) Set gain value AT$SG=0,5 OK

Set microphone gain value to 5.

M7-21-0010-107 - 141 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.24 $SAMP: Control audio amplification

This command is used to control audio amplification. Note that this command has to be used after audio path is configured by AT$SP. The write command is available only in audio modes 1 to 5.

Syntax AT$SAMP=<channel>,<amp> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT$SAMP? Response(s) $SAMP: <handheld earpiece amplification>,<handfree speaker

amplification> OK

AT$SAMP=? $SAMP: (0-1),(1-4)

OK

Parameter(s) <channel> The target to set amplification value Numeric 0 Handheld earpiece. 1 Handfree speaker. <amp> The amplification value to be set Numeric 1-4

Handheld earpiece amplification Handfree speaker amplification

Value AMP(dB) Value AMP(dB)

0 N/A 0 N/A

1 -11 1 -22.5

2 1 2 -3.5

3 1 3 2.5

4 1 4 8.5

Example(s) Set amplification AT$SAMP=0,4 OK

Set handheld earpiece amplification to 4

M7-21-0010-107 - 142 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.25 $SAEC: Configure the acoustic echo canceller

This command is used to configure the acoustic echo canceller (AEC). The AEC feature is the task responsible for tuning the echo canceller included in the audio path. This command is only available to enable/disable AEC. To tune the AEC coefficients please use AT$SQC command. The write command is available only in audio modes 1 to 5.

Syntax AT$SAEC=<mode> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT$SAEC? Response(s) $SAEC: <mode>

OK AT$SAEC=? $SAEC: (0-1)

OK

Parameter(s) <mode> Numeric 0 AEC disable. 1 AEC enable.

M7-21-0010-107 - 143 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.26 $SCS: Audio configuration select

This command is used to change audio settings to the ones of selected audio mode. The selection will be saved into non-volitile store and loaded at each device start up time. This command is useful for user. One can modify audio settings by AT command - AT$SP, AT$SG, AT$SAMP, AT$SQCS first, then write them with AT$SCW. To load back previous settings, simply use AT$SCS=<mode>.

Syntax AT$SCS=<Audio mode> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT$SCS? Response(s) $SCS: <Audio mode>

OK AT$SCS=? $SCS: (0-5)

OK

Parameter(s) <mode> Numeric 0 Standard audio mode of this device. It contains the optimized settings

and can’t be modified by AT command. 1 Customer specific mode for a basic hand-free. 2 Customer specific mode for handset. 3 Customer specific mode for digital path. 4 Customer specific mode. 5 Customer specific mode.

Example(s) Select an audio setting AT$SCS=3 OK

Select audio settings from audio mode 3

M7-21-0010-107 - 144 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.27 $SCW: Audio configuration write

This command is used to write current audio settings into selected audio mode (actually a non-volatile store). The following audio parameters will be saved: AT$SP=<path> AT$SG=<path>[0 to 3], <gain> AT$SAMP=<path>[0 and 1], <amp> AT$SQCS=<profile>

Syntax AT$SCW Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Example(s) Save audio settings AT$SCW OK

Save audio settings

M7-21-0010-107 - 145 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.28 $SQCS: Audio quality coefficients profile select

This command is used to change coefficients of acoustic modules to selected profile settings. AT$SQCS reads settings from profile (non-volatile store) first and then change the active values of each coefficient. Profile 0 to profile 2 are fine tuned factory default setting and can’t be changed. For convenient using, profile 3 to profile 9 can be used to save user settings. One may use AT$SQCS to select active profile first, then change coefficients using AT$SQC, and finally save the settings use AT$SQCW. The write command is only available under audio modes 1 to 5 (check AT$SCS for audio mode setting).

Syntax AT$SQCS=<Profile> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT$SQCS? Response(s) $SQCS: <Profile>

OK AT$SQCS=? $SCS: (0-9)

OK

Parameter(s) <Profile> Numeric 0 Factory default coefficients setting for handfree path. 1 Factory default coefficients setting for handset path. 2 Factory default coefficients setting for digital path. 3-9 Customer specific coefficients setting.

Example(s) Select coefficients profile AT$SQCS=0 OK

Select coefficients of factory default setting profile 0.

M7-21-0010-107 - 146 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.29 $SQC: Audio quality coefficients control

This command is used to configure the coefficients of voice acoustic modules. The write command is only available under audio modes 1 to 5 (check AT$SCS for audio mode setting).

Syntax AT$SQC=<module name>,<value1> <value2> … Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT$SQC? Response(s) $SQC: “LIM,<value1> <value2>…<value41>

“ES”, <value1> <value2>…<value23> “AEC” , <value1> <value2>…<value17> “IIR” , <value1> <value2>…<value98> “FIR” , <value1> <value2>…<value31> “ANR” , <value1> <value2>…<value5> “AGC” , <value1> <value2>…<value12> “DRC” , <value1> <value2>…<value59> OK

AT$SQC=? $SQC: (“LIM”, “ES”, “AEC”, “IIR”, “FIR”, “ANR”, “AGC”, “DRC”), (list of

coefficients) OK

Parameter(s) <module name> String LIM Limiter ES Echo Suppressor AEC Acoustic Echo Canceller IIR Infinite Impulse Response FIR Finite Impulse Response ANR Ambient Noise Reduction AGC Automatic Gain Control DRC Dynamic Range Compressor <Value> Numeric Please refer to “ETM Audio user guide” of Locosto application note.

M7-21-0010-107 - 147 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


Example(s) Set coefficients

AT$SQC=“LIM”, “1 160 160 16 001C 0014 FFF1

FFBB FFA7 0000 00BA 0130 0087 FEA4 FCDE

FD77 01E9 0949 104A 132B 32767 0 32767 6

6666 028F” OK

AT$SQC=“ES”, “1 6 0007 0000 1FD9 2818 0176

005E 05D1 0176 02EA 00BF 0005 0005 000D

5A9D 2879 7FFF 2879 5A9D 2026 0082 7FFF” OK AT$SQC=“AEC”, “1 0007 5000 0000 0000 0000 537D 7FB2 65AD 07D0 3FFF 1000 1000 0032 0813 00A0 0CCB” OK

AT$SQC=“IIR”, “1 0001 00a0 0001 0001 000f

0001 691c bac7 e753 41e7 ebaf 1130 f774 03d7

005c 0091 ffb2 ff50 0041 ff19 ffdc 0000 0000

0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0001

0005 4892 0000 ecb6 10d9 5bfc 2e3e d6b4 ffff

735c 0000 daad a8fc 7aa0 464c 56a2 ffff 46e4

0001 a002 a04d 2fab 4323 20ea 0001 481a 0001

4b37 92a0 3f32 b54c 3700 ffff 5242 0000 7542

8ffd 478b 85db 372d 0007 0000 0000 0000 0000

0000 0000 0000 0000 2000” OK

AT$SQC=“FIR”, “4000 0000 0000 0000 0000

0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

Set LIM coefficients. Set ES coefficients. Set AEC coefficients. Set IIR coefficients. Set FIR coefficients.

M7-21-0010-107 - 148 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


0000 0000” OK

AT$SQC=“ANR”, “0001 0003 0002 0007 0001” OK

AT$SQC=“AGC”, “1 0001 00A0 09FE 7E7E 7FB4

59F9 7EB8 7333 7F5C 7333 0000” OK

AT$SQC=“DRC”, “1 0101 0001 00a0 222c 2822

0a0a 0a0a 0606 0606 5440 4a54 0808 0808

5440 4a54 7e9b 7e9b 7e9b 7e9b 03ff 0303 0303

0202 0202 ff99 ff8d ffc3 012d 049e 0a0f 104c

1551 173e 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

0000 0000 0086 016d 01b5 fced f285 edd3 fb9c

1562 22af 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

0000” OK

Set ANR coefficients. Set AGC coefficients. Set DRC coefficients.

M7-21-0010-107 - 149 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.30 $SQCW: Audio quality coefficients profile write

This command is used to write the coefficients of each acoustic module into profile(a non-volatile store). The profile index should be selected first by AT$SQCS. Profile 0 to 2 are factory default setting and can’t be changed. Any attempt to write settings into profile 0 to 2 will get an error. It only works in profile 3 to 9. User must select active profile using AT$SQCS first, and then set coefficients using AT$SQC. The write command is only available under audio modes 1 to 5 (check AT$SCS for audio mode setting).

Syntax AT$SQCW Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Example(s) Set coefficient of acoustic modules into profile AT$SQCW OK

Set coefficients of acoustic modules into profile.

M7-21-0010-107 - 150 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.31 $TRING: Set duration to clip data on incoming call

This command is used to set duration to clip data on incoming call. Syntax

AT$TRING=<duration> Response(s) OK

ERROR AT$TRING=? Response(s) $TRING: (list of supported < duration>s)

OK

AT$TRING? Response(s) $TRING: < duration>

OK

Parameter(s) < duration> Numeric 500-5000 mS

Example(s) Set Ring duration AT$TRING=1000 OK

Duration is 1000ms.

M7-21-0010-107 - 151 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.32 +GDT: Play a call tone

When <TYPE> =1 ~ 18, the MS will enable the <TYPE> of call tone. When <TYPE> =0, the MS will stop the call tone.

Syntax AT+GDT=<TYPE> Response(s) OK

ERROR AT+GDT=? Response(s) +GDT: (list of supported < type>s)

OK

Parameter(s) < type> Call tone type Numeric 1 Dial Call Tone 2 Authentication Call Tone 3 Ringing Call Tone 4 Busy Call Tone 5 Congested Call Tone 6 Call Drop Call Tone 7 Dial Call Tone 8 Radio Ack Call Tone 9 Waiting Call Tone 10 Timealert Call Tone 11 Auto Redial Call Tone 12 Test Tone Call Tone 13 Warning Beep Call Tone 14 Rising Call Tone 15 Falling Call Tone 16 Forbid Keypad Call Tone 17 Power On Call Tone 18 Error Prompt Call Tone

Example(s) Play Call tone AT+GDT=3 OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 152 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.33 $NOSLEEP: Disable Deep Sleep Mode

This command is used to disable/enable MS of entering deep sleep mode. Syntax

AT$NOSLEEP=<mode> Response(s) OK

ERROR

Parameter(s) <mode> Call tone type Numeric 0 Enable Deep Sleep Mode 1 Disable Deep Sleep Mode. MS does not enter deep sleep mode.

Example(s) Disable Deep Sleep Mode AT$NOSLEEP=1 OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 153 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.34 $CSSL: Play Tone on Speaker

This command allows a tone to be played on current speaker. Frequency, gain, and duration can be set.

Syntax AT$CSSL=<isEnable>[,<gain>,<freq>,<duration>] Response(s) OK

ERROR

Parameter(s) <isEnable> Numeric 0 Stop Playing 1 Play a tone <gain> Numeric 0~49 This parameter sets the tone gain. The value means that –(0~49)db.

The default value is 1. <freq> Numeric 1~2000 This parameter sets the tone frequency (Hz) (mandatory if

<isEnalbe>=1). The range is between 1Hz to 2000Hz. <duration> Numeric 100~5000 This parameter sets the tone duration (unit of 100ms). When this

parameter is 0 (default value), the duration is infinite, and the tone can be stopped by AT$CSSL=0.

Example(s)

Play tone AT$CSSL=1,15,300,200 OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 154 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


5.35 $GLED: Green LED Setting

This command is used to set the duration of green led. Syntax

AT$GLED=<mode>,<light_duration>,<dark_duration> Response(s) OK

ERROR

Parameter(s) <mode> Numeric 0 Turn off. 1 Turn on. <light_duration> Numeric 1~65535 Duration of green led to be light.(ms) <dark_duration> Numeric 1~65535 Duration of green led to be dark.(ms)

Example(s)

Set Green LED Duration AT$GLED=1,100,200 $GLED:1 OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 155 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


6 Phonebook Commands

6.1 +CPBS: Select phonebook memory storage

Set command selects phonebook memory storage <storage> which is used by other phonebook commands. If setting is failed in an MS error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned. Read command returns current selected memory together with entry numbers used and the entire entry numbers in the selected storage. Test command returns supported storages as compound value.

Syntax AT+CPBS=<storage> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR:<err> AT+CPBS? Response(s) +CPBS: <storage>[,<used>,<total>]

OK AT+CPBS=? Response(s) +CPBS: (list of supported <storage>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <storage> Phonebook memory storage String “EN” SIM/USIM (or ME) emergency number(+CPBW is not be applicable for

this storage) “BD” Barred dialing number “FD” SIM fix dialing-phonebook “DC” MO dialled calls list (+CPBW may not be applicable for this storage) “LD” SIM/UICC last dialing phonebook “RC” Last received numbers list “LR” Last received numbers “SM” SIM phonebook “MT” Combined ME and SIM phonebook “AD” Abbreviated dialing numbers “SD” Service dialing number “MC” Last missed number list “LM” Last missed number “ON” Own numbers (MSISDN) list “UD” User person number

M7-21-0010-107 - 156 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


<used> Number of used locations in selected storage Numeric <total> Total entry number in selected memory storage Numeric

Example(s) Select phonebook memory storage AT+CPBS=”DC” OK AT+CPBS? +CPBS: "SM",17,100 OK

1. Set phonebook storage 2. Query current value

M7-21-0010-107 - 157 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


6.2 +CPBR: Read phonebook entries

Execution command returns phonebook entries in location number ranges between <index1> and <index2> from the current phonebook memory storage selected by +CPBS. If <index2> is invalid, only location <index1> is returned. Fields of each entry returned are location number <indexn>, phone number <number> stored in this location, (format <type> for phone number), and text <text> associated with the number, respectively. If all locations this command requests are empty (but available), no information text line is returned and +CME ERROR: <err> could be returned. If list setting is failed in an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned. If it is possible to show Chinese name in phone book, it’s better that “UCS2” is set by character set (+CSCS) first.

Syntax AT+CPBR=<index1>[,<index2>] Response(s) [+CPBR: <index1>,<number>,<type>,<text>]

[+CPBR: <index2>,<number>,<type>,<text>] OK

+CME ERROR:<err> AT+CPBR=? Response(s) +CPBR: (1-<maxindex>), [<nlength>], [<tlength>]

OK

Parameter(s) <index1> The first reading location number in phonebook

memory. Numeric

<index2> The last reading location number in phonebook memory.

Numeric

<maxindex> Maximum location number for the currently selected storage.

Numeric

<type> Indicating type of address octet in integer format. Numeric 129 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international 145 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number 161 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number 128-255 Other values refer to GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 <nlength> Indicating the maximum length of field <number> Numeric <tlength> Indicating the maximum length of field <text> Numeric <number> Indicating the phone number of format <type> String <text> Character set specified by command select TE

character Set +CSCS String

M7-21-0010-107 - 158 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


Example(s) Read phonebook entries AT+CPBS=”SM” OK AT+CPBR=1,5 +CPBR:1,”27998800”,129,”David” +CPBR:3,”27998800”,129,”JENNY” +CPBR:5,”27998800”,129,”Davis” OK

1. ADN phonebook selected 2. Display location number

1,3,5 with location number

M7-21-0010-107 - 159 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


6.3 +CPBF: Find phonebook entries

Execution command returns the phonebook entries (from the current phonebook memory storage selected by +CPBS which alphanumeric fields start from string <findtext> that is provided. Fields of each entry returned are location number <indexn>, phone number <number> stored in this location, (format <type> for phone number), and text <text> associated with the number, respectively. If listing is failed in an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned. Test command returns the maximum lengths of <number> and <text> fields. However, the lengths may not be available if storage is assigned to SIM. It is possible to use this command with UCS2 strings. If wrong UCS2 format is provided, the string is considered as an ASCII string.

Syntax AT+CPBF=<findtext> Response(s) +CPBF:<index1>,<number>,<type>,<text>

OK +CME ERROR <err>

AT+CPBF=? Response(s) +CPBF: [<nlength>],[<tlength>]

OK

Parameter(s) <findtext> Character set specified by command select TE

character Set +CSCS. If <findtext> is NULL, +CPBF will list all phonebook entries sorted in alphabetical order.

String

<index1> Value in the range of location numbers of phonebook memory.

Numeric

<number> Indicating the phone number of format <type> String <type> Indicating type of address octet in integer format. Numeric 128 Unknown type(Unknown number format) 129 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international 145 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number 161 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number 177 Network specific number(ISDN format) <text> Character set specified by command select TE


<nlength> Indicating the maximum length of field <number> Numeric <tlength> Indicating the maximum length of field <text> Numeric

M7-21-0010-107 - 160 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


Example(s) Find phonebook entries AT+CPBS=”SM” OK AT+CPBF=”DA” +CPBF: 1,”27998800”,129,”DAVID” +CPBF: 5,”123456”,129,”dad” +CPBF: 8,”222222”,129,”Davis” +CPBF: 10,”99999”,129,”dAllen” OK

1. Select phonebook storage. 2. Find entries start with “DA”.

List all phonebook entries (in alphabetical order) AT+CPBF=”” +CPBF: 3,”112233”,129,”Allan” +CPBF: 9,”09111111”,129,”Ben” +CPBF: 1,”27998800”,129,”DAVID” +CPBF: 5,”123456”,129,”dad” +CPBF: 8,”222222”,129,”Davis” +CPBF: 10,”99999”,129,”dAllen” +CPBF: 4,”987654”,129,”Eddy” +CPBF: 2,”09222222”,129,”Ella” OK

1. List all entries.

M7-21-0010-107 - 161 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


6.4 +CPBW: Write phonebook entry

Set command writes phonebook entry in location number <index> of phonebook memory <storage> excluding “DC”, “LD”, “MC” and “RC”. Fields of each entry users need to provide are phone number <number>, (the format <type> for phone number),and text <text> associated with the number, respectively. If <number> is provided without <index>, entry is written to the first free location in the phonebook (the implementation of this feature is manufacturer specific.) If all fields except <index> are omitted, phonebook storage entry will be deleted. If writing is failed in an ME error, ERROR is returned.

Syntax AT+CPBW=[<index>][,<number>[,<type>[,<text>]]] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR <err> AT+CPBW=? Response(s) +CPBW: (list of <index>),[<nlength>],(list of <type>),[<tlength>]

OK

Parameter(s) <index> Value in the range of location numbers of

phonebook memory. Numeric

<number> Indicating the phone number of format <type> String <type> Indicating type of address octet in integer format. Numeric 128 Unknown type(Unknown number format) 129 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international 145 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number 161 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number 177 Network specific number(ISDN format) <text> Character set specified by command select TE


<nlength> Indicating the maximum length of field <number> Numeric <tlength> Indicating the maximum length of field <text> Numeric

Example(s) Write phonebook entry AT+CPBW=1,”27998800”, 129,”DAVID” OK AT+CPBW=,”27998800”, 129,”DAVID” OK AT+CPBW=1 OK

1. Write at location 1. 2. Write at first location available. 3. Location 1 erased.

M7-21-0010-107 - 162 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


7 Short Messages Commands

7.1 +CSMS: Select message service

Set command is responsible for selecting messaging service <service>. It returns the types of messages supported by the ME; for example, <mt> for mobile terminated messages, <mo> for mobile originated messages, and <bm> for broadcast type messages. If the service which is chose is not supported by the ME (but is supported by the TA), final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> shall be returned. A list of error code is provided in section 12.2 Message Service Failure Result Code. Read command returns supported message types along the current service setting. Test command returns a list of all services supported by the TA.

Syntax AT+CSMS=<service> Response(s) +CSMS: <mt>,<mo>,<bm>


AT+CSMS? Response(s) +CSMS: <service>,<mt>,<mo>,<bm>


AT+CSMS=? +CSMS: (list of supported <service>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <service> Numeric 0 GSM 03.40 and 03.41. 1 GSM 03.40 and 03.41(the requirement of <service> setting 1 is

mentioned under corresponding command descriptions.). <mt> Mobile Terminated Messages Numeric 0 Type not supported. 1 Type supported. <mo> Mobile Originated Messages Numeric 0 Type not supported. 1 Type supported. <bm> Broadcast Type Messages Numeric 0 Type not supported. 1 Type supported.

M7-21-0010-107 - 163 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


Example(s) Set Message Service AT+CSMS=0 +CSMS:1,1,1 OK

Show Message Service AT+CSMS? +CSMS:0,1,1,1 OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 164 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


7.2 +CPMS: Preferred message storage

Set command selects memory storages <mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> to be used for reading, writing, etc. If the storage which is chose is not appropriate for the ME (but is supported by the TA), final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> shall be returned. A list of error code is provided in section 12.2 Message Service Failure Result Code. Test command returns lists of memory storages supported by the TA.

Syntax AT+CPMS=<mem1>[,<mem2>][,<mem3>] Response(s) +CPMS: <used1>, <total1>, <used2>, <total2>, <used3>, <total3>


AT+CPMS? Response(s) +CPMS: <used1>, <total1>, <used2>, <total2>, <used3>, <total3>


AT+CPMS=? +CPMS: (list of supported <mem1>s),(list of supported

<mem2>s),(list of supported <mem3>s) OK

Parameter(s) <mem1> Memory used to list, read and delete messages. String “SM” SMS message storage in SIM. “ME” ME message storage.

Example(s) Set All ME & Show Message list AT+CPMS= “ME”,”ME”,”ME” +CPMS: 0,0,0,0,0,0 OK AT+CPMS? +CPMS: “ME”,0,0,”ME”,0,0,”ME”,0,0 OK

Set ME & check message number and total space

M7-21-0010-107 - 165 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


AT+CPMS = “ME” +CPMS: 0,0,3,15,3,15 OK AT+CPMS? +CPMS: “ME”,0,0,”SM”,3,15,”SM”,3,15 OK

Set All SM AT+CPMS= “SM”,”SM”,”SM” +CPMS: 3,15,3,15,3,15 OK AT+CPMS? +CPMS: “SM”,3,15,”SM”,3,15,”SM”,3,15 OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 166 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


7.3 +CMGF: Message format

Set command tells the TA which input and output format of messages is used. <mode> indicates the format of messages used for commands such as send, list, read and write, and for unsolicited result codes come from received messages as well. Mode can be either PDU mode (entire TP data units used) or text mode (headers and body of the messages are treated as separate parameters). Text mode uses the value of parameter <chset> specified by command Select TE Character Set +CSCS to inform the character set to be used in the message body within the TA-TE interface. Test command returns supported modes as a compound value.

Syntax AT+CMGF=<mode> Response(s) OK

+CMS ERROR: <err> AT+CMGF? Response(s) +CMGF: <mode>

OK AT+CMGF=? +CMGF: (list of supported <mode>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <mode> Numeric 0 PDU mode. 1 Text mode.

Example(s) Set to Text Mode AT+CMGF=1 OK AT+CMGF? +CMGF: 1 OK

Set to PDU mode AT+CMGF=0 OK AT+CMGF? +CMGF: 0 OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 167 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


7.4 +CSCA: Service centre address

Set command updates SMS’s address through the service centre where handles SMS’s transmission. In text mode, setting is used by send and write commands. So does PDU mode base on the circumstance that the length of the SMSC address coded into <pdu> parameter equals zero.

Syntax AT+CSCA = <sca>[,<tosca>] Response(s) OK

+CMS ERROR: <err> AT+CSCA? Response(s) +CSCA: <sca>,<tosca>


Parameter(s) <sca> Service center address String <tosca> Type of service center address Numeric 145 When <sca> first character of <da> is +(IRA 43). 129 When <sca> first character of <da> is not +(IRA 43).

Example(s) Set SC address AT+CSCA=”+886935074443”,145 OK

Read SC address AT+CSCA? +CSCA: “+886935074443”,145 OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 168 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


7.5 +CSMP: Text mode parameters

Set command is used to select values for additional parameters needed when SM is sent to the network or placed in a storage when text format message mode is selected. It is possible to set the valid period starts from the time SM is received by SMSC (<vp> is in range 0... 255) or to define the absolute and valid period for termination (<vp> is a string). The format of <vp> is provided by <fo>. NOTE: When it stores a SMS-DELIVER from the TE to the preferred memory storage in text mode (refer command Write Message to Memory +CMGW), <vp> field can be used for <scts>.

Syntax AT+CSMP=<fo>[,<vp>[,<pid>[,<dcs>]]] Response(s) OK

+CMS ERROR: <err> AT+CSMP? Response(s) +CSMP: <fo>,<vp>,<pid>,<dcs>


Parameter(s) <fo> Bit 4, Bit 3 TP-VPF

00 TP-VP field not present 10 TP-VP field present – relative format 01 TP-VP field present – enhanced format (not supported) 11 TP-VP field present – absolute format Bit 2 TP-RD (Reserved) Bit 1, Bit 0 TP-MTI 01 SMS-SUBMIT (in the direction MS to SC)

Numeric

17 <vp> Validity period Numeric 0-143 (vp + 1) * 5 minutes 144-167 12 hours + ((vp – 143) * 30 minutes) 168-196 (vp – 166) * 1 day 197-255 (vp – 192) * 1 week <pid> Protocol identifier. Please see GSM 03.40

TP-Protocol-Identifier (TP-PID) description. Numeric

0 Default value. 1-255 Protocol identifier. <dcs> Data coding scheme. Please check GSM 03.38 SMS Data

Coding Scheme for detail. Numeric

M7-21-0010-107 - 169 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


0 Default alphabet. 4 8 bit data. 8 UCS2 (16bit).

Example(s) Set parameter for saving/sending short message AT+CSMP=17,168,0,0 OK

Set <vp>=2 days, <pid>=0 and <dcs>=0

M7-21-0010-107 - 170 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


7.6 +CSDH: Show text mode parameters

+CSDH command controls whether or not the detailed header information is shown from the result codes in text mode.

Syntax AT+CSDH =<show> Response(s) OK

+CMS ERROR: <err> AT+CSDH? Response(s) +CSDH: <show>

OK AT+CSDH=? +CSDH: (list of supported <show>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <show> Control displaying header values defined in commands

+CSCA and +CSMP (<sca>, <tosca>, <fo>, <vp>, <pid> and <dcs>) nor <length>, <toda> or <tooa> in +CMT, +CMGL, +CMGR result codes for SMS-DELIVERs and SMS-SUBMITs in text mode; for SMS-COMMANDs in +CMGR result code, do not show <pid>, <mn>, <da>, <toda>, <length> or <cdata>.

Numeric

0 Don’t show those information. 1 Show those information.

M7-21-0010-107 - 171 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


7.7 +CSCB: Select cell broadcast message types

Set command selects which types of CBMs are received by the ME. Test command returns supported modes as a compound value. If <mids> or <dcss> is set to an empty string, there is no action on <mids> or <dcss>.

Syntax AT+CSCB=<mode>[,<mids>[,<dcss>]] Response(s) OK

+CMS ERROR: <err> AT+CSCB? Response(s) +CSCB: <mode>,<mids>,<dcss>


AT+CSCB=? +CSCB: (list of supported <mode>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <mode> Message mode Numeric 0 Message types specified in <mids> and <dcss> are accepted. 1 Message types specified in <mids> and <dcss> are not accepted. <mids> Cell Broadcast Message(CBM) ID combinations or

range. Default is empty string. String

<dcss> CBM data coding scheme. Default is empty string. String

Example(s) Read message types AT+CSCB? +CSCB: 0,”1,4,10”,”2,3” OK

Set message types in supported range AT+CSCB=0,”1,4,5”,”3,4” OK AT+CSCB? +CSCB=0, “1,4,5”,”3,4” OK

Set message types out of supported range AT+CSCB=0,”65536”,”7,8” +CMS ERROR: 302 AT+CSCB?

M7-21-0010-107 - 172 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


+CSCB=0,”1,4,5”,”3,4” OK

Set <mids> or <dcss> in the command to be unaccepted AT+CSCB=1,”2-5”,”8” OK AT+CSCB? +CSCB=1,”2-5”,”8” OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 173 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


7.8 +CSAS: Save settings

Execution command saves active message service settings into a non-volatile memory. A TA can contain several profiles of settings. Settings specified in commands such as Service Centre Address +CSCA, Set Message Parameters +CSMP and Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB (if implemented) are saved. Certain settings may not be supported by the storage (e.g. (U)SIM SMS parameters) and therefore can not be saved.

Syntax AT+CSAS=<profile> Response(s) OK

+CMS ERROR: <err> AT+CSAS=? Response(s) +CSAS: (list of supported <profile>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <profile> Profile number where settings to be stored Numeric 0 Profile 0. 1 Profile 1.

M7-21-0010-107 - 174 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


7.9 +CRES: Restore settings

Execution command restores message service settings from non-volatile memory to active memory. A TA can contain several profiles of settings. Settings specified in commands such as Service Centre Address +CSCA, Set Message Parameters +CSMP and Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB (if implemented) are restored. Certain settings may not be supported by the storage (e.g. (U)SIM SMS parameters) and therefore can not be restored.

Syntax AT+CRES=<profile> Response(s) OK

+CMS ERROR: <err> +CRES=? Response(s) +CRES: (list of supported <profile>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <profile> Profile number where settings to be stored Numeric 0 Profile 0. 1 Profile 1.

M7-21-0010-107 - 175 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


7.10 +CNMI: New message indications to TE

The indication will be sent from the network to TE when TE is active; for example, DTR signal is ON. <mode> controls the processing of unsolicited result codes specified within this command, <mt> sets the result code indication routing for SMS-DELIVERs, <bm> for CBMs and <ds> for SMS-STATUS-REPORTs. <bfr> defines the handling method for buffered result codes when <mode> 1, 2 or 3 is enabled. If ME does not support requested item (although TA does), final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. Test command returns the settings supported by the TA as compound values. NOTE: Command Select Message Service +CSMS should be used to detect ME support of mobile terminated SMs and CBMs, and to define whether a message which is routed directly to TE should be acknowledged or not.

Syntax AT+CNMI=<mode>[,<mt>[,<bm>[,<ds>[,<bfr>]]]] Response(s) OK

+CMS ERROR: <err> AT+CNMI? Response(s) +CNMI: <mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds>, <bfr>

OK AT+CNMI=? +CNMI: (list of supported <mode>s), (list of supported <mt>s),

(list of supported <bm>s),(list of supported <ds>s), (list of supported <bfr>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <mode> Numeric 0 Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA. If TA result code buffer is full,

indications can be buffered in some other place or the oldest indications may be discarded and replaced with the new receiver indications.

1 Discard indication and reject new received message unsolicited result code when TA-TE link is reserved (e.g. in on-line data mode). Otherwise forward them directly to the TE.

2 Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA when TA-TE link is reserved (e.g. in on-line data mode) and flush them to the TE after reservation. Otherwise forward them directly to the TE.

<mt> Numeric 0 No SMS-DELIVER (message to ME) indications are routed to the TE.

Default. 1 SMS-DELIVER is stored in ME. Indication of the memory location is

routed to the TE by using the unsolicited result code:

M7-21-0010-107 - 176 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


+CMTI: <mem>, <index> 2 class 0, class 1 and class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed directly to the TE

using unsolicited result code: +CMT: [<alpha>],<length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode enabled) or +CMT: <oa>, <alpha>],<scts>,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>, <sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF><data> (text mode enabled; about parameters in italics, refer command +CSDH) class 0 message and messages in the message waiting indication group (discard message), may be copied to TE, In this case , ME shall send the acknowledgement to the network. Class2 message and messages in the message waiting indication group (store message) result in indication as defined in <mt>=1.

<bm> Numeric 0 No CBM indications are routed to the TE. 2 CBM is routed directly to the TE by using the unsolicited result code:

+CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode enabled) or +CBM: <sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,<pages><CR><LF> <data> (text mode enabled) refer to 03.41, Content of message is limited to 82 bytes and total pages are no more than 15.

<ds> Numeric 0 No SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE 1 SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicited result

code: +CDS: <length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode enabled) or +CDS: <fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st> (text mode enabled)

<bfr> Numeric 0 TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is

flushed to the TE when <mode> 1…3 is entered (OK response shall be given before flushing the codes).

1 TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is cleared when <mode> 1..3 is entered.

Example(s) AT+CNMI=? +CNMI: (0-2),(0-3),(0,2),(0,1),(0,1) OK AT+CNMI? +CNMI: 0,0,0,0,0 OK AT+CNMI =0,0,0,0,0 OK AT+CNMI?

M7-21-0010-107 - 177 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


+CNMI: 0,0,0,0,0 OK AT+CNMI =1,3,2,1,1 OK AT+CNMI? +CNMI: 1,3,2,1,1 OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 178 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


7.11 +CMGL: List messages

Execution command returns messages with status value <stat> from message storage <mem1> to the TE. If status of the message is 'received unread', status in the storage will be changed to 'received read'. If listing is failed, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. For PDU mode, entire data units <pdu> are returned. If status of the message is 'received unread', status in the storage will be changed to 'received read'. If listing is failed, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. Test command shall return a list of all status values supported by the TA.

Syntax (Text mode) AT+CMGL=<stat> Response(s) +CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<oa/da>,[<alpha>],

[<scts>][,<tooa/toda>,<length>]<CR><LF><data>[<CR><LF> OK

+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<da/oa>,[<alpha>], [<scts>][,<tooa/toda>,<length>]<CR><LF><data>[...]]


Syntax (PDU mode) AT+CMGL=<stat> Response(s) +CMGL: <index>,<stat>,[<alpha>],

<length><CR><LF><pdu>[<CR><LF>+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,[<alpha>], <length><CR><LF><pdu>[...]]


AT+CMGL=? Response(s) +CMGL: (list of supported <stat>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <stat> Message status String,

Numeric Description text mode

(<mode>=1) PDU mode (<mode>=0) Default

Received unread messages "REC UNREAD" 0 for SMS reading

commands Received read messages "REC READ" 1

Stored unsent "STO UNSENT" 2 for SMS writing

M7-21-0010-107 - 179 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


messages commands

Stored sent messages "STO SENT" 3

All messages "ALL" 4

<index> Index value of supported memory location numbers Numeric <oa/da> Originating Address/Destination Address String <alpha> Alphanumeric representation of <da> or <oa> String <scts> Service centre time stamp Numeric <tooa/toda> Type of Originating Address/Type of Destination Address. Numeric 145 When first character of <da> is + (IRA 43). 129 When first character of <da> is not +. <length> Message length Numeric <pdu> The message with PDU format Numeric

Example(s) List All Messages in text mode AT+CMGF=1 OK AT+CMGL=”ALL” +CMGL: 2,”STO UNSENT”,”0921214863”,,,129,4 TEST OK AT+CMGL=”STO UNSENT” +CMGL: 2,”STO UNSENT”,”0921214863”,,,129,4 TEST OK

1. Set message format to text mode. 2. List all messages

List All Messages in PDU mode AT+CMGF=0 OK AT+CMGL=2 +CMGL: 1,2,,8 0791889683434822110000800004A800 +CMGL: 2,2,,36 079188968343482251B702812200008F1E040D021800A0E974B8EEF5BADFEF2E71D91D778DDF6D903A4C0601 +CMGL: 3,2,,8 0791889683434822110000800004A800 +CMGL: 4,2,,35 079188968343482251BA02812500008F1D0A0A030606010A030C04020893D567BA421D26ABE98A7B5B1D06 +CMGL: 5,2,,9 0791889683434822110000800004A801E1 +CMGL: 6,2,,9 0791889683434822110000800004A801E4 OK

1. Set message format to PDU mode. 2. List "STO UNSENT" message

M7-21-0010-107 - 180 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


7.12 +CMGD: Delete message

Execution command deletes message from preferred message storage <mem1> location <index>.

Syntax AT+CMGD=<index> Response(s) OK

+CMS ERROR: <err>

Parameter(s) <index> Index value of supported memory location numbers Numeric

Example(s) Delete Message number 7 AT+CMGD=7 OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 181 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


7.13 +CMGC: Send command

Execution command sends a command message from a TE to the network (SMS-COMMAND). The way to enter the text is similar as those specified in command Send Message +CMGS, but the format is fixed to be a sequence of two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts into 8-bit octets.

Syntax (Text mode) AT+CMGC=<fo>, <ct>[,<pid>[,<mn>[,<da>[,<toda>]]]]<CR>Text is entered<ctrl-z/ESC> Response(s) +CMGC: <mr>[,<scts>]


Syntax (PDU mode) AT+CMGC=<length><CR> PDU can be entered<CTRL-Z>/<ESC> Response(s) +CMGC: <mr>[,<ackpdu>]


Parameter(s) <fo> First octet. Please refer to +CSMP for details. Numeric <ct> Command Type. GSM 03.40 TP-Command-Type. Numeric 0-255 <pid> Please refer to +CSMP for details Numeric <mn> Message Number Numeric <da> Destination Address. GSM 03.40 TP-

Destination-Address Address-Value field in string format.

String

<toda> Type of Destination Address. Please refer to +CMGL for details.

Numeric

<mr> Message Reference Numeric <scts> Service centre time stamp Numeric <ackpdu> A backup of PDU data Numeric

Example(s) Send the message AT+CMGF=1 AT+CMGS=”0921214863”,129 >This a test! (ctrl+z) +CMGS:14 AT+CNMI=1,0,0,1,0 OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 182 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


AT+CMGC=,,,14,”0921214863”,129 > (ctrl+z) +CMGC: 15 +CDS:SMS-STATUS-REPORT

M7-21-0010-107 - 183 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


7.14 +CMGR: Read message

For text mode, execution command returns message with location value <index> from message storage <mem1> to the TE. If status of the message is 'received unread', status in the storage will be changed to 'received read'. If reading is failed, final result code +CMS ERROR:<err> is returned. For PDU mode, execution command returns message with location value <index> from preferred message storage <mem1> to the TE. Status of the message and entire message data unit <pdu> are both returned. If status of the message is 'received unread', status in the storage will be changed to 'received read'. If reading is failed, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.

Syntax (Test mode) AT+CMGR=<index> Response(s) +CMGR: <stat>,<oa>,[<alpha>],<scts>[,<tooa>,

<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF><data> OK

+CMGR: <stat>,<da>,[<alpha>][,<toda>,<fo>, <pid>,<dcs>,[<vp>],<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF><data>


Syntax (PDU mode) AT+CMGR=<index> Response(s) +CMGR:<stat>,[<alpha>],<length><CR><LF><pdu>


Parameter(s) <index> Index value of supported memory location numbers Numeric <stat> Message status. Please refer to +CMGL for details. String,

Numeric <oa> Originating address. 03.40 TP-Originating-Address

Address-Value field in string format. String

<alpha> Alphanumeric representation of <da> or <oa> String <scts> Service centre time stamp Numeric <tooa> Type of originating address. Please refer to +CMGL for

details. String

<fo> First octet. Please refer to +CSMP for details. Numeric <pid> Please refer to +CSMP for details Numeric <dcs> Data coding scheme. Please check GSM 03.38 SMS Data

Coding Scheme for detail. Numeric

<sca> Service center address String <tosca> Type of service center address Numeric

M7-21-0010-107 - 184 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


<length> Message length Numeric <da> Destination Address. GSM 03.40 TP- Destination-Address

Address-Value field in string format. String

<vp> Validity period. Please refer to +CSMP for details. Numeric <pdu> The message with PDU format Numeric

Example(s) Read the message in text mode AT+CMGR=0;+CMGR=1;+CMGR=2;+CMGR=4 +CMGR: 2,,26 079188968343482211B602812500008F13683A1DAE7BBDEEF7BB4B5C76C75DE3771B +CMGR: 2,,26 079188968343482211B602812500008F13683A1DAE7BBDEEF7BB4B5C76C75DE3771B +CMGR: 2,,36 079188968343482251B702812200008F1E040D021800A0E974B8EEF5BADFEF2E71D91D778DDF6D90 3A4C0601 +CMGR: 2,,35 079188968343482251BA02812500008F1D0A0A030606010A030C04020893D567BA421D26ABE98A7B 5B1D06 OK

1. Read message of index 0, 1, 2, 4

Read the message in PDU mode AT+CMGF=0 OK AT+CMGR=2 +CMGR: 2,,36 079188968343482251B702812200008F1E040D021800A0E974B8EEF5BADFEF2E71D91D778DDF6D90 3A4C0601 OK AT+CMGR=4 +CMGR: 2,,35 079188968343482251BA02812500008F1D0A0A030606010A030C04020893D567BA421D26ABE98A7B 5B1D06 OK AT+CMGR=3 +CMGR: 2,,8 0791889683434822110000800004A800 OK AT+CMGR=5 +CMGR: 2,,9

1. Set message format to PDU mode. 2. Read message index 2. 3. Read message index 4. 4. Read message index 3. 5. Read message index 5.

M7-21-0010-107 - 185 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


0791889683434822110000800004A801E1 OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 186 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


7.15 +CNMA: New message acknowledgement to ME/TA

Execution command confirms correct response to a new message (SMS=DELIVER or SMS-STATUS-REPORT) which is routed directly to the TE (refer command +CNMI tables 2 and 4). This acknowledgement command (causes ME to send RP-ACK to the network) shall be used when +CSMS parameter <service> equals 1. TA shall not send another +CMT or +CDS result code to TE before previous one is acknowledged. If ME does not get acknowledgement within a specific period (network timeout), ME should send RP-ERROR to the network. ME/TA shall automatically disable the ability of routing to TE by setting both <mt> and <ds> values of +CNMI to zero. If command is executed without receiving any acknowledgement, or some other ME related error occurs, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. A list of error code is provided in section 12.2 Message Service Failure Result Code.

Syntax AT+CNMA Response(s) OK

+CMS ERROR: <err>

M7-21-0010-107 - 187 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


7.16 +CMGS: Send short message

Execution command sends message from a TE to the network (SMS-SUBMIT). Message reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message delivery. <scts> is optionally returned (when +CSMS <service> value is 1 and network supports). Values can be used to identify message upon unsolicited delivery status reports result code. If sending is failed in a network or an ME error, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. This command can be abort.

Syntax (Text mode)

AT+CMGS =<da>[,<toda>]<CR> Text is entered<ctrl-Z/ESC> Response(s) +CMGS: <mr>[,<scts>]


Syntax (PDU mode)

AT+CMGS=<length><CR> PDU is given<ctrl-Z/ESC> Response(s) +CMGS: <mr>[,<ackpdu>]


Parameter(s) <da> Destination Address. GSM 03.40 TP-


String


Numeric

<mr> Message Reference Numeric

<ackpdu> A backup of PDU data Numeric

Example(s)

Send message in Text mode AT+CMGF=1 OK AT+CMGS=”0921214863” > TEST +CMGS: 230 OK

1. Set Text mode 2. Send the message “TEST” to 0921214863

M7-21-0010-107 - 188 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


7.17 +CMSS: Send short message from the storage

Execution command sends message with location value <index> from preferred message storage <mem2> to the network (SMS-SUBMIT). If new recipient address <da> is provided for SMS-SUBMIT, it shall be used instead of choosing the one stored with the message. Reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message delivery. If sending is failed in a network or an ME error, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. This command can be abort.

Syntax

AT+CMSS=<index>[,<da>[,<toda>]] Response(s) +CMSS: <mr>


Parameter(s) <index> Index value of supported memory location numbers Numeric

<da> Destination Address. GSM 03.40 TP- Destination-Address Address-Value field in string format.

String


Numeric

Example(s)

Send message from storage in Text mode AT+CMGF=1 OK AT+CMGW=”0921214863” > TEST1 +CMGW: 11 OK AT+CMSS=11 +CMSS: 234 OK

1. Set Text mode. 2. Write the message “TEST” to into memory. 3. Send the message in index 11.

M7-21-0010-107 - 189 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


7.18 +CMGW: Send Write Message to Memory

Execution command stores a message (either SMS-DELIVER or SMS-SUBMIT) to memory storage <mem2>. Memory location <index> of the stored message is returned. Althoug message status will be set to 'stored unsent' by default, parameter <stat> can be provided by other status values. The entering of PDU is done similarly as those specified in command Send Message +CMGS. If writing is failed, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. This command can be abort.

Syntax (Text mode)

AT+CMGW[=<da>[,<toda>[,<stat>]]]<CR> text is entered<ctrl-Z/ESC> Response(s) +CMGW: <index>


Syntax (PDU mode)

AT+CMGW[=<length>[,<stat>]<CR> PDU is given<ctrl-Z/ESC> Response(s) +CMGW: <index>


Parameter(s) <da> Destination Address. GSM 03.40 TP-


String


Numeric

<stat> Message status. Please refer to +CMGL for details. String, Numeric

<length> Message Length Numeric

Example(s)

Write a SMS in text mode AT+CMGF=1 OK AT+CMGW=”0921214863” > TEST1 +CMGW: 11 OK

1. Set text mode. 2. Write the message “TEST1” into memory.

M7-21-0010-107 - 190 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8 Fax Control

8.1 +FDT: Send a page

The FDT command requests the DCE to transmit a Phase C page. It is issued at the beginning of each page, either in Phase B or in Phase D. When the DCE is ready to accept Phase C data, it shall issue the negotiation responses and the CONNECT result code to the DTE. Negotiation responses are controlled by the FNR sub parameters (8.5.1.11/T.32). In Phase B (after ATA, ATD or the end of a document), the FDT command releases the DCE to keep processing with negotiation and releases the DCS message to the remote station. In Phase D (after sending a page), the FDT command resumes transmission after the end of a previous page. The FDT command returns a positive CONNECT result code response if the DCE is ready for data; otherwise, it will return others (e.g. FHS:<hangup code>). Following the CONNECT message, the DTE shall deliver image data to the DCE as negotiated. After image data is delivered, the DTE shall deliver a <DLE><ppm> a pair of characters (8.3.3.7/T.32) to mark the end of the data and to indicate subsequent actions. The FDT command results in an ERROR result code response if the DCE is on-hook.

Syntax

AT+FDT Response(s) [+FNF:<NSF FIF data>]

[+FCI:<remote ID>] [+FIS:<parameters>] [+FCS:<parameters>] CONNECT

+FHS:<hangup code> OK

ERROR

Example(s)

AT+FDT +FCS:0,3,0,0,0,0,2,0 CONNECT

M7-21-0010-107 - 191 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.2 +FDR: Receive a page

The command initiates transition to Phase C data reception after the following circumstances: answering, dialing, a document is received, or a page is received. The DCE may report the negotiated T.30 parameters, with the remote ID and NSS frame information if available. When the DCE is ready to commence data transfer, it shall issue a CONNECT response code. After the DTE receives the CONNECT response and the DTE is ready to accept data, it shall issue a <DC2> character (T.50 1/2) to the DCE. From the +FDR command to the end of Phase C Data, the DCE is in a data transfer state and shall not respond to DTE command lines. The DCE shall respond to four T.50 control characters: <DC1> (1/1) and <DC3> (1/3) flow control characters, <CAN> (1/8) (8.3.4.6/T.32) and to <"?"> (3/15) (8.3.4.7/T.32); all other characters are discarded. When the DCE delivers the last octet of a page, indicated by the <DLE><ETX> stream termination sequence, the DCE shall report the Page Status via the +FPS:<ppr> response, described in 8.4.3/T.32 (http://www.itu.int/rec/T-REC-T/e). The Page Status is also stored in the +FPS parameter (8.5.2.2/T.32). The <ppr> response codes are described in Table 18. After a Page Status is reported, the DCE shall report the post page message from the remote facsimile station via the +FET:<ppm> response (8.4.4.1/T.32), which signals the intentions of the remote station. <ppm> response codes are described in Table 19/T.32 (http://www.itu.int/rec/T-REC-T/e). The DCE shall use the <ppr> code stored in the +FPS parameter to determine the Post Page response to the remote facsimile station. The DTE may modify the +FPS parameter before issuing the +FDR command, which releases that message. The DTE must issue a +FDR command to release Post Page Messages. The +FDR command shall return an ERROR result code if the DCE is on-hook or if the capability of receiving is missed or disabled (FCR0, 8.5.1.9/T.32).

Syntax

AT+FDR Response(s) [+FNC:<NSC FIF data>]

[+FTI:<remote ID>] [+FCS:<parameters>] CONNECT

M7-21-0010-107 - 192 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


+FHS:<hangup code> OK

ERROR

Example(s)

AT+FDR +FCS:0,3,0,0,0,0,2,0 CONNECT

M7-21-0010-107 - 193 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.3 +FKS: Terminate a session, orderly fax abort

The +FKS command causes the DCE to terminate the session in an orderly manner. In particular, it will send a DCN message at the next opportunity and hang up. At the end of the termination process, the DCE shall report the +FHS response with result code, defined in 8.4.5,/T.32 (http://www.itu.int/rec/T-REC-T/e), go On-Hook and set FCLASS0 if FCLASS0 is supported. The DTE may also invoke this operation using the T.50 <CAN> (Cancel, T.50 1/8) character during Phase C data reception (see 8.3.4.7/T.32). If the DTE issues this command while the DCE is On-Hook, the DCE shall report OK.

Syntax

AT+FKS Response(s) +FHS:<hangup code>

OK ERROR

M7-21-0010-107 - 194 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.4 +FIP: Initialize service class 2 parameters

The +FIP command causes the DCE to initiate all Service Class 2 Facsimile Parameters to the manufacturer who determined default settings. This command does not change the setting of +FCLASS. This command has the same effect as if the DTE had issued individual parameter setting commands. This command may be issued during a session. The DCE shall use the new settings they are sampled next time; for example, a new +　 FIS setting would be used next time the DCE enters Phase B.

Syntax

AT+FIP[=<value>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Parameter(s)

<value> Not support and always set 0. Numeric

M7-21-0010-107 - 195 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.5 DCE responses, +FCS: Report DCS Frame Information

This is used for reporting negotiated parameters. Phase C data will be formatted as it is reported by these subparameters. +FDT or +FDR command execution may generate these responses before the CONNECT result code, if new DCS frames are generated or received. The ATD, ATA, +FDT, or +FDR commands may generate this message.

Syntax

+FCS: <VR>, , <WD>, <LN>, <DF>, <EC>, <BF>, <ST>, <JP>

Parameter(s)

<VR> Vertical resolution Numeric

0 R8 x 3.85 l/mm, Normal

1 R8 x 7.7 l/mm, Fine

2 R8 x 15.4 l/mm

4 R16 x 15.4 l/mm

8 200dpi x 100 l/25.4 mm

10 200dpi x 200 l/25.4 mm

20 200dpi x 400 l/25.4 mm

40 300dpi x 300 l/25.4 mm

 Bit Rate Numeric

0 2400 bit/s

1 4800 bit/s

2 7200 bit/s

3 9600 bit/s

4 12000 bit/s

5 14400 bit/s

<WD> Page width in pixels Numeric

0 1728 (R8 d/mm), 3456 (R16 d/mm), 1728 (200 dpi), 2592 (300 dpi), 3456 (400 dpi)

1 2048 (R8 d/mm), 4096 (R16 d/mm), 2048 (200 dpi)

2 2432 (R8 d/mm), 4864 (R16 d/mm), 2432 (200 dpi)

<LN> Page Length Numeric

0 A4, 297 mm

1 B4, 364 mm

2 Unlimited length

<DF> Data Compression format Numeric

0 1-D Modified Huffman (T.4)

M7-21-0010-107 - 196 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


<EC> Error Correction Numeric

0 Disable ECM

<BF> File Transfer Numeric

0 Disable file transfer modes

<ST> Scan Time/Line Numeric

0 0 ms (VR=0), 0 ms (VR>0)

1 5 ms (VR=0), 5 ms (VR>0)

2 10 ms (VR=0), 5 ms (VR>0)

3 10 ms (VR=0), 10 ms (VR>0)

4 20 ms (VR=0), 10 ms (VR>0)

5 20 ms (VR=0), 20 ms (VR>0)

6 40 ms (VR=0), 20 ms (VR>0)

7 40 ms (VR=0), 40 ms (VR>0)

<JP> JPEG for color and B&W Numeric

0 Disable JPEG coding

M7-21-0010-107 - 197 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.6 DCE responses, +FIS: Report remote capabilities, DIS

This is used for reporting remote facsimile station capabilities and intentions. Originate, Answer, +FDT, +FDR command execution may generate these responses, if the corresponding frames are received before the OK final result code. The ATD, ATA, +FDT, or +FDR commands may generate this message.

Syntax

+FIS: <VR>, ,<WD>,<LN>,<DF>,<EC>,<BF>,<ST>,<JP>

For parameters details, please refer to +FCS message.

M7-21-0010-107 - 198 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.7 DCE responses, +FPI: Report remote ID,CIG

The response reports the received remote polling station ID string, if any. Originate, Answer, +FDT or +FDR command execution may generate these responses, if the corresponding frames are received. The DCE shall report the characters mentioned in the ID string in reverse time order from the order received from the remote station. The ATD, ATA, +FDT, or +FDR commands may generate this message.

Syntax

+FPI: <CIG ID string>

Parameter(s)

<CIG ID string> String

M7-21-0010-107 - 199 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.8 DCE responses, +FNC: Report NSC frame

The response reports any received Non-Standard Setup frames, and it is one response per frame. Originate, Answer, +FDT or +FDR command execution may generate these responses, if the corresponding frames are received. The NSF Facsimile Information Field (FIF) frame octets (start from the country code excepts FCS) are presented in hex notation, and separated by spaces. HDLC flags, and zero bits inserted for transparency are removed. Frame octets are reported in the order received. For each frame octet the LSB is the first bit sent or received. For example, the two octet bit string 0001101101000101 would be reported D8 A2. The facsimile DCE reports the frame; it need not act on it. Specification of any other Non Standard behavior is beyond the scope of this document. The ATD, ATA, +FDT, or +FDR commands may generate this message.

Syntax

+FNC: <NSC FIF string>

Parameter(s)

<NSC FIF string> String

M7-21-0010-107 - 200 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.9 DCE responses, +FNF: Report NSF frame

Please refer to +FNC message. The ATD, ATA, +FDT, or +FDR commands may generate this message.

Syntax

+FNF: <NSF FIF string>

Parameter(s)

<NSF FIF string> String

M7-21-0010-107 - 201 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.10 DCE responses, +FNS: Report NSS frame

Please refer to +FNC message. The ATD, ATA, +FDT, or +FDR commands may generate this message.

Syntax

+FNS: <NSS FIF string>

Parameter(s)

<NSS FIF string> String

M7-21-0010-107 - 202 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.11 DCE responses, +FPW: Report password

The response reports the received password string, if any. Originate, Answer, +FDT or +FDR command execution may generate these responses, if the corresponding frames are received. If the corresponding subparameter in the +FAP parameter is set, the DCE shall report the characters mentioned in the string in reverse time order from the order received from the remote station. For example, if the following hexadecimal Password string is received: <39><38><37><36><35><34><33><32><31><30><39><38><37><36><35><34><33><32><31> <30> The result would be: +FPW: "01234567890123456789" The ATD, ATA, +FDT, or +FDR commands may generate this message.

Syntax

+FPW: <PWD string>

Parameter(s)

<PWD string> String

M7-21-0010-107 - 203 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.12 DCE responses, +FSA: Report destination subaddress

The response reports the received destination subaddress string, if any. Originate, Answer, +FDT or +FDR command execution may generate these responses, if the corresponding frames are received. The ATD, ATA, +FDT, or +FDR commands may generate this message.

Syntax

+FSA: 

Parameter(s)

 String

M7-21-0010-107 - 204 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.13 DCE responses, +FPA: Report polling address

The response reports the received polling address string, if any. Originate, Answer, +FDT or +FDR command execution may generate these responses, if the corresponding frames are received. The ATD, ATA, +FDT, or +FDR commands may generate this message.

Syntax

+FPA: <SEP string>

Parameter(s)

<SEP string> String

M7-21-0010-107 - 205 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.14 DCE responses, +FPS: Report T.30 phase C page reception

The +FPS:<ppr> is generated by the DCE at the end of Phase C data reception within the execution of a +FDR command. The initial <ppr> is generated by the DCE; it depends on the DCE for T.4 or T.6 error checking capabilities, controlled by the +FCQ parameter (8.5.2.3/T.32). Note that the <ppr> value may be changed by the DCE in response to a remote request for procedure interrupt (8.5.2.2/T.32). The receiving DCE may count lines, bad lines, maximum consecutive bad lines, and octets lost due to DCE buffer overflow, and report them: <lc>: line count; <blc>: bad line count; <cblc>: maximum consecutive bad line count; this is the number of lines in the largest group of consecutive bad lines; <lbc>: lost octet count. The line counts are qualified by the DCE’s copy quality checking capabilities, controlled by the +FCQ parameter (8.5.2.3/T.32). If the DCE is not configured to count lines, or if line counts are irrelevant (e.g. in Binary File Transfer mode, Recommendation T.434) the DCE shall set the line counts to 0. A receiving DTE may inspect <ppr>, and write a modified value into the +FPS parameter. The DCE shall hold the corresponding Post Page Response message until it is released by a subsequent +FDR command from the DTE.

Syntax

+FPS: <ppr>, <lc>, <blc>, <cblc>, <lbc>

Parameter(s)

<ppr> Numeric

1 Page good. (T.30 label: MCF; Result code: OK)

2 Page bad, retrain requested. (T.30 label: RTN; Result code: ERROR)

3 Page good, retrain requested. (T.30 label: RTP; Result code: OK)

4 Page good, remote request for procedure interrupt accepted .(T.30 label: PIP; Result code: OK)

5 Page bad, retrain requested; remote request for procedure interrupt accepted. (T.30 label: PIN; Result code: ERROR)

<lc> Line count. Numeric

M7-21-0010-107 - 206 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


<blc> Bad line count, reports the number of bad lines set. Numeric

<cblc> Consecutive bad line count: reports the number of consecutive bad lines sent.

Numeric

<lbc> Lost byte count, reports the number of lost bytes Numeric

M7-21-0010-107 - 207 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.15 DCE responses, +FHS: Call termination status

+FHS indicates that the call has been terminated. The hangup cause is reported, and stored in the +FHS parameter for later inspection. +FHS:<hsc> is a possible intermediate result code to any DTE action command described in 8.3/T.32. It is always followed by the OK final result code. All <hsc> codes are two-digit hexadecimal values. The <hsc> values are organized according to the Phases of the facsimile transaction as defined by Recommendation T.30.

Syntax

+FHS: <hsc>

Parameter(s)

<hsc> Hangup status code Hexadecimal

00-0F Call placement and termination

00 Normal and proper end of connection.

01 Ring detect without successful handshake.

02 Call aborted.

03 No loop current.

04 Ringback detected, no answer (timeout).

05 Ringback detected, answer without CED.

10-1F Transmit Phase A and miscellaneous errors

10 Unspecified Phase A error.

11 No answer (T.30 T1 timeout).

20-3F Transmit Phase B hangup codes

20 Unspecified transmit Phase B error.

21 Remote cannot receive or send.

22 COMREC error in transmit Phase B.

23 COMREC invalid command received.

24 RSPREC error.

25 DCS sent three times without response.

26 DIS/DTC received 3 times; DCS not recognized.

27 Failure to train at 2400 bit/s or +FMS value.

28 RSPREC invalid response received.

40-4F Transmit Phase C hangup codes

40 Unspecified transmit Phase C error.

41 Unspecified image format error.

M7-21-0010-107 - 208 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


42 Image conversion error.

43 DTE to DCE data underflow.

44 Unrecognized transparent data command.

45 Image error, line length wrong.

46 Image error, page length wrong.

47 Image error, wrong compression code.

50-6F Transmit Phase D hangup codes

50 Unspecified transmit Phase D error.

51 RSPREC error.

52 No response to MPS repeated 3 times.

53 Invalid response to MPS.

54 No response to EOP repeated 3 times.

55 Invalid response to EOP.

56 No response to EOM repeated 3 times.

57 Invalid response to EOM.

58 Unable to continue after PIN or PIP.

70-8F Receive Phase B hangup codes

70 Unspecified receive Phase B error.

71 RSPREC error.

72 COMREC error.

73 T.30 T2 timeout, expected page not received.

74 T.30 T1 timeout after EOM received.

90-9F Receive Phase C hangup codes

90 Unspecified receive Phase C error.

91 Missing EOL after 5 seconds (3.2/T.4).

92 Bad CRC or frame(ECM mode).

93 DCE to DTE buffer overflow.

A0-BF Receive Phase D hangup codes

A0 Unspecified receive Phase D errors.

A1 RSPREC invalid response received.

A2 COMREC invalid response received.

A3 Unable to continue after PIN or PIP.

C0-DF Reserved for future standardization

E0-FF Reserved for manufacturer-specific use

M7-21-0010-107 - 209 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.16 +FCLASS: Service class identification and control

Set command puts the TA into a particular mode of operation (data, fax, voice etc.). This causes the TA to process information in a manner suitable for that type of information (rather than for other types of information). Query command returns current Service Class settings of a Facsimile DCE. The response shall be a single value. Test command returns available Service Classes of a Facsimile DCE. The response is a string of values, separated by commas, followed by a result code.

Syntax

AT+FCLASS=<n> Response(s) OK

ERROR AT+FCLASS? Response(s) <n>

OK AT+FCLASS=? Response(s) (list of supported(<n>)

OK

Parameter(s)

<n> Service class.

0 Data modem (ITU-T Rec. V.250).

2.0 Fax class 2.0(ITU-T Rec. T.32).

8 Voice

M7-21-0010-107 - 210 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.17 +FCC: DCE capabilities parameter

+FCC allows the DTE to sense and constrain the capabilities of the facsimile DCE, from the choices defined in Table 2/T.30 (http://www.itu.int/rec/T-REC-T/e). When +FCC is modified by the DTE, the DCE shall copy +FCC into +FIS.

Syntax

AT+FCC=<VR>, , <WD>, <LN>, <DF>, <EC>, <BF>, <ST>, <JP> Response(s) OK

ERROR AT+FCC? Response(s) +FCC: <VR>, , <WD>, <LN>, <DF>, <EC>, <BF>, <ST>, <JP>

OK AT+FCC=? Response(s) +FCC: (list of supported <VR>s),(list of supported s),(list of

supported <WD>s),(list of supported <LN>s),(list of supported <DF>s),(list of supported <EC>s),(list of supported <BF>s),(list of supported <ST>s),(list of supported <JP>s) OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 211 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.18 +FIS: Current session parameter

+FIS allows the DTE to sense and constrain the capabilities of current session. The DCE uses +FIS to generate DIS or DTC messages directly, and uses +FIS together with received DIS messages to generate DCS messages. The DCE shall set the FIS parameter from the FCC parameter on DCE initialization upon FIP command execution, when FCC is written and at the end of a session.

Syntax

AT+FIS=<VR>, , <WD>, <LN>, <DF>, <EC>, <BF>, <ST>, <JP> Response(s) OK

ERROR AT+FIS? Response(s) +FIS: <VR>, , <WD>, <LN>, <DF>, <EC>, <BF>, <ST>, <JP>

OK AT+FIS=? Response(s) +FIS: (list of supported <VR>s),( list of supported s),( list of

supported <WD>s),(list of supported <LN>s),(list of supported <DF>s), (list of supported <EC>s),( list of supported <BF>s),( list of supported <ST>s),(list of supported <JP>s) OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 212 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.19 +FCS: Current session results (Fax class 2.0)

The +FCS parameter is loaded with the negotiated T.30 parameters for the current session. A transmitting DCE generates DCS; a receiving DCE gets DCS from the remote station. The DTE may only read this parameter. The DCE shall set the +FCS parameter to the default values on DCE initialization, on +FIP command execution, and at the end of a session. The contents of +FCS are spontaneously reported during execution of +FDR or +FDT commands by the +FCS: <VR>, , <WD>, <LN>, <DF>, <EC>, <BF>, <ST>, <JP> response which usesthe same compound parameter format.

Syntax

AT+FCS? Response(s) +FCS: <VR>, ,<WD>,<LN>,<DF>,<EC>,<BF>,<ST>,<JP>

OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 213 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.20 +FLI: Local facsimile station ID string, TSI/CSI

To sets the local ID string used by the remote station to identify the originating station.

Syntax

AT+FLI=<local ID string> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+FLI? Response(s) +FLI: <local ID string>

OK AT+FLI=? Response(s) +FIS: (list of the range of supported characters with hexadecimal)

OK

Parameter(s)

<local ID string> String

M7-21-0010-107 - 214 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.21 +FPI: Local facsimile station ID, CIG(local Polling ID)

This is used by the remote station to identify the originating station.

Syntax

AT+FPI=<local polling ID string> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+FPI? Response(s) +FPI: <local polling ID string>

OK AT+FPI=? Response(s) +FPI: (list of the range of supported characters with hexadecimal)

OK

Parameter(s)

<local polling ID string> String

M7-21-0010-107 - 215 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.22 +FNS: Pass-through non-standard negotiation byte string

The DCE shall send the corresponding non-standard facilities frame if +FNS is not a null string. The type of frame is determined by the type of negotiation frame and can be sent for NSF sent with DIS; NSS sent with DCS; NSC sent with DTC. The DCE only delivers the data; the DTE must determine the content. The first octet must be the country code (see Recommendation T.35). This parameter may require 180 hexadecimal characters for specifying. The +FNS= <hex string> may be repeated with new data which will be appended to the data entered previously. The +FNS="" command resets this parameter to a null string. The <hexadecimal coded octet string> shall consist of pairs of hexadecimal numbers (T.50 3/0-3/9, 4/1-4/6). Spaces between octets shall be ignored by the DCE. The DCE shall send octets in the order loaded. Each octet shall be sent LSB first; the string "D8A2" would result in the following bit pattern: 0001101101000101. (Note – This is the same format used in Non-Standard frame reports, see 8.4.2.4/T.32.)

Syntax

AT+FNS=<string of hexadecimal coded octets> Response(s) OK

ERROR: <err> AT+FNS? Response(s) +FNS: <string of hexadecimal coded octets>

OK AT+FNS=? Response(s) +FNS: (number of octets that the parameter can hold)

OK

Parameter(s)

<string of hexadecimal coded octets> With hexadecimal format String

M7-21-0010-107 - 216 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.23 +FLP: Indicate document available for polling

To indicate whether there is a document to poll.

Syntax

AT+FLP=<value> Response(s) OK

ERROR AT+FLP? Response(s) +FLP: <value>

OK AT+FLP=? Response(s) +FLP: (list of supported <value>s)

OK

Parameter(s)

<value> Numeric

0 Indicates that the DTE has no document to poll. The DIS bit 9 will be cleared. Any received DTC frames will be result in an orderly disconnection, with hangup status code +FHS:23.

1 Indicates that the DTE has a document ready for polling. The DIS bit 9 will be set, to report this to the remote station. Any received DTC frames will be accepted. The DCE shall reset this parameter to 0 after a polled document is sent.

M7-21-0010-107 - 217 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.24 +FSP: Request to poll

To indicate whether the originating station wants to receive a polled document.

Syntax

AT+FSP=<value> Response(s) OK

ERROR AT+FSP? Response(s) +FSP: <value>

OK AT+FSP=? Response(s) +FSP: (list of supported <value>s)

OK

Parameter(s)

<value> Numeric

0 Indicates that the DTE does not want to poll. Bit 9 in a received DIS frame will be ignored.

1 Indicates that the DTE can receive a polled document. Bit 9 in received DIS frames will be reported by the +FPO response (8.4.2.2). The DCE shall reset this parameter to 0 after a polled document is received.

M7-21-0010-107 - 218 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.25 +FCR: Capability to receive

To enable or disable fax reception.

Syntax

AT+FCR=<value> Response(s) OK

ERROR AT+FCR? Response(s) +FCR: <value>

OK

AT+FCR=? Response(s) +FCR: (list of supported <value>s)

OK

Parameter(s)

<value> Numeric

0 Indicates the DCE will not receive message data; also, the DCE will not be able to poll a remote device. This clears bit 10 in the DIS or DTC frame. This can be used when the DTE has insufficient storage, or if the DCE does not have a Phase C demodulator. The DCE can send and can be polled for a document.

1 Indicates the DCE can receive message data. Bit 10 in the DIS or DTC frame will be set.

M7-21-0010-107 - 219 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.26 +FBU: HDLC frame reporting enable

To enable or disable HDLC frame reporting.

Syntax

AT+FBU=<value> Response(s) OK

ERROR AT+FBU? Response(s) +FBU: <value>

OK

AT+FBU=? Response(s) +FBU: (list of supported <value>s)

OK

Parameter(s)

<value>

0 Disables HDLC frame reporting.

1 Enables the DCE to report the contents of Phase B and Phase D HDLC frames to the DTE, as they are sent and received, in addition to other responses. These will be reported using the FHT: and FHR: 　　responses, described in 8.6/T.32.

M7-21-0010-107 - 220 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.27 +FNR: Negotiation reporting enable

This command is a compound parameter, used to control the reporting of messages generated during T.30 Phase B negotiations. There are four switches for four types of reports.

Syntax

AT+FNR=<rpr>, <tpr>, <idr>, <nsr> Response(s) OK

ERROR AT+FNR? Response(s) +FNR: <rpr>,<tpr>,<idr>,<nsr>

OK AT+FNR=? Response(s) +FNR: (list of supported<rpr>s),(list of supported <tpr>s),(list of

supported<idr>s),(list of supported<nsr>s) OK

Parameter(s)

<rpr> Numeric

0 Receiver parameters are not reported. +FIS and +FTC reports are suppressed.

1 Receiver parameters are reported +FIS and +FTC reports are generated

<tpr> Numeric

0 Transmitter parameters are not reported. +FCS reports are suppressed, +FCS parameter is still loaded.

1 Transmitter parameters are reported. +FCS reports are generated.

<idr> Numeric

0 ID strings are not reported. +FTI,+FCI and +FPI reports are suppressed.

1 ID strings are reported. 　 +FTI,+FCI and +FPI reports are generated.

<nsr> Numeric

0 Non-standard frames are not reported. +FNF,+FNS and +FNC reports are suppressed

1 Non-standard frames are reported. +FNF,+FNS and +FNC reports are generated

M7-21-0010-107 - 221 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.28 +FAP: Address & polling capabilities

This command indicates inbound subaddressing, selective polling and password capabilities to remote station via the corresponding bits in the DIS or DTC frames.

Syntax

AT+FAP=, <sep>, <pwd> Response(s) OK

ERROR AT+FAP? Response(s) +FAP: , <sep>, <pwd>

OK AT+FAP=? Response(s) +FAP: (list of supported s),(list of supported <sep>s),(list of

supported <pwd>s) OK

Parameter(s)

 Subaddressing capability Numeric

0 Disable

1 Enable

<sep> Selective polling capability Numeric

0 Disable

1 Enable

<pwd> Password capability Numeric

0 Disable

1 Enable

M7-21-0010-107 - 222 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.29 +FSA: Address & polling frame/subaddress

The DCE shall send the numeric string contained in +FSA at the times specified in Recommendation T.30, if the corresponding parameter is not a null string. Recommendation T.30 defines these frames for values of digits 0-9, space, * and # characters only. The DCE shall transmit digit string characters to the remote station in reversed time order from the order in the command line. For example, if the command line AT+FSA="1 012 3456789**01#" is issued, the DCE would add two space characters, and send a SUB frame with FIF consisting of the following octets (expressed as hexadecimal digits): <23><31><30><2A><2A><39><38><37><36><35><34><33><20><32><31><30><20><31><20><20> If less than 20 characters are specified in a non-null string, the DCE shall append space characters (2/0). If the specified string is more than 20 characters, an ERROR result code is generated.

Syntax

AT+FSA=<destination subaddress string> Response(s) OK

ERROR AT+FSA? Response(s) +FSA: <destination subaddress string>

OK AT+FSA=? Response(s) +FSA: (list of supported characters)

OK

Parameter(s)

<destination subaddress string> Should less than 20 octets. String

M7-21-0010-107 - 223 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.30 +FPA: Address & polling frame/polling address

The DCE shall send the numeric string contained in +FPA at the times specified in Recommendation T.30, if the corresponding parameter is not a null string. Recommendation T.30 defines these frames for values of digits 0-9, space, * and # characters only. The DCE shall transmit digit string characters to the remote station in reversed time order from the order in the command line. If less than 20 characters are specified in a non-null string, the DCE shall append space characters (2/0). If the specified string is more than 20 characters, an ERROR result code is generated.

Syntax

AT+FPA=<selective polling address string> Response(s) OK

ERROR AT+FPA? Response(s) +FPA: <selective polling address string>

OK AT+FPA=? Response(s) +FPA: (list of supported characters)

OK

Parameter(s)

< selective polling address string> Should less than 20 octets. String

M7-21-0010-107 - 224 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.31 +FPW: Address & polling frame/password

The DCE shall send the numeric string contained in +FPW at the times specified in Recommendation T.30, if the corresponding parameter is not a null string. The +FPW parameter is used for the PWD frame sent with either DTC or DCS. Recommendation T.30 defines these frames for values of digits 0-9, space, * and # characters only. The DCE shall transmit digit string characters to the remote station in reversed time order from the order in the command line. If less than 20 characters are specified in a non-null string, the DCE shall append space characters (2/0). If the specified string is more than 20 characters, an ERROR result code is generated.

Syntax

AT+FPW=<password string> Response(s) OK

ERROR AT+FPW? Response(s) +FPW: <password string>

OK AT+FPW=? Response(s) +FPW: (list of supported characters)

OK

Parameter(s)

<password string> String should less than 20 octets. String

M7-21-0010-107 - 225 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.32 +FIE: Procedure interrupt enable

This command decides the operation upon receipts Procedure Interrupt Requests from remote station. For transmission (+FDT), Procedure Interrupt Requests from the remote station are not reported directly; only the +FVO response is reported. For reception (+FDR), Procedure Interrupt Requests from the remote station are reported in the +FET: response. The value stored in the +FPS parameter will be adjusted to 4 or 5. If the DTE issues a subsequent +FDR command with the +FPS value intact, the DCE will complete the negotiation and issue a +FVO response.

Syntax

AT+FIE=<value> Response(s) OK

ERROR AT+FIE? Response(s) +FIE: <value>

OK AT+FIE=? Response(s) +FIE: (list of supported <value>s)

OK

Parameter(s)

<value> Numeric

0 Procedure Interrupt Requests from the remote station are ignored, and not reported to the DTE. For the +FET: response (8.4.4.1/T.32), PRI-Q reports will be replaced by non-PRI equivalents.

1 Procedure Interrupt Requests from the remote station are accepted, negotiated and reported using the +FVO response (8.4.4.2/T.32)

M7-21-0010-107 - 226 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.33 +FPS: Page status

The +FPS parameter which contains a value represents the post page response, and it also includes copy quality and related end-of-page status. These values correspond to post page response messages defined in Recommendation T.30. The receiving DCE sets this parameter after it receives a page of Phase C data. The transmitting DCE sets this parameter with the status reported by the receiving station. The DTE may inspect or modify this parameter. Valid <ppr> is defined below. Its value is also reported by the +FPS:<ppr> response to the +FDR command (8.4.3/T.32). The DCE may set this parameter to values 1, 2 or 3 based on its own copy quality checking or access to received signal quality. The DCE shall set this parameter to a value of 1 if copy quality checking is disabled (+FCQ=0, see 8.5.2.3/T.32). Copy quality checking is the responsibility of the DCE. However, a receiving DTE may do its own Copy Quality checking. The DTE may request a Procedure Interrupt from the remote station using this parameter. To do so, the DTE shall modify the value reported by the DCE before it issues the next +FDR command, which in turn instructs the DCE to send the resulting post page response to the remote facsimile station.

Syntax

AT+FPS=<ppr> Response(s) OK

ERROR AT+FPS? Response(s) +FPS: <ppr>

OK AT+FPS=? Response(s) +FPS: (list of supported <ppr>s)

OK

Parameter(s)

<ppr> Post page response Numeric

1 Page good (T.30 label: MCF; Result code: OK)

2 Page bad; retrain requested (T.30 label: RTN; Result code: ERROR)

3 Page good; retrain requested (T.30 label: RTP; Result code: OK)

4 Page good; remote request for procedure interrupt accepted (T.30 label:

M7-21-0010-107 - 227 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


PIP; Result code: OK)

5 Page bad; retrain requested; remote request for procedure interrupt accepted (T.30 label: PIN; Result code: ERROR)

M7-21-0010-107 - 228 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.34 +FCQ: Copy quality checking

The +FCQ compound parameter controls copy quality checking and correction by a facsimile DCE. The <rq> subparameter controls copy quality checking and correction of data which is received from the remote station and delivered to the local DTE; the <tq> subparameter controls copy quality checking and correction of image data which is received from the local DTE and sent to the remote facsimile station. For any data type supported, DCE is responsible for Receive Copy Quality Checking. However, the DTE may turn off copy quality checking by setting +FCQ=0,0, or by setting +FND=1. Copy quality checking consists of determining if the incoming image data conforms to the negotiated standard format, e.g. Recommendation T.4 or T.6. Copy quality correction consists of detecting errors and altering the data in some way to guarantee that only valid data (according to negotiated parameters) is delivered. The methods used for copy quality checking or for correction are not a subject of T.32. The DCE may use the associated T.30 control parameters to condition its Copy Quality Checking behavior. Common procedures for Copy Quality correction include deletion of bad lines or replacement of bad lines by previous good lines. The DCE shall report on Received Copy Quality to the DTE in the page status report, +FPS:<ppr>,<lc>,<blc>,<cblc>,<lbc>, and record it in the +FPS parameter.

Syntax

AT+FCQ=<rq>,<tq> Response(s) OK

ERROR AT+FCQ? Response(s) +FCQ: <rq>,<tq>

OK AT+FCQ=? Response(s) +FCQ: (list of supported <rq>s),(list of supported <tq>s)

OK

Parameter(s)

<rq> Receive quality check Numeric

0 Receive checking disabled; +FPS is set to 1.

1 Receive checking enabled.

2 Receive checking enabled. Modem detects and correct errors.

M7-21-0010-107 - 229 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


<tq> Transmit quality check Numeric

0 Transmit checking disabled.

1 Transmit checking enabled; modem sends <CAN> following any errors.

2 Transmit checking enabled; modem detects and corrects errors.

M7-21-0010-107 - 230 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.35 +FRQ: Receive quality checking

The DCE may use this compound parameter to make the "Copy Quality OK" decision in the T.30 flow chart (Figure A.7/T.30). If this is used, the DCE shall judge Copy Quality that is unacceptable if either the percentage of good lines is too low or too many consecutive lines contain errors. Bad line counts are reported in the +FPS:<blc> response, described in 8.4.3/T.32 (http://www.itu.int/rec/T-REC-T/e). A value of 0 disables either subparameter for using in copy quality checking.

Syntax

AT+FRQ=<pgl>,<cbl> Response(s) OK

ERROR AT+FRQ? Response(s) +FRQ: <pgl>,<cbl>

OK AT+FRQ=? Response(s) +FRQ: (list of supported <pgl>s),(list of supported <cbl>s)

OK

Parameter(s)

<pgl> Percentage of good lines Numeric

0 Not support, set 0.

<cbl> Consecutive bad lines Numeric

0 Not support, set 0.

M7-21-0010-107 - 231 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.36 +FCT: DTE phase C response timeout

The command determines how long the DCE will wait for a command after having transmitted all available Phase C data. For transmission (+FDT), the DCE shall properly terminate any Phase C data that is transferred in progress when this timeout is reached. Then DCE will execute an implied +FKS sequential abort command. For reception (+FDR), the DCE shall send the T.30 DCN response to the remote station and execute an implied sequential abort command when this timeout is reached.

Syntax

AT+FCT=<value> Response(s) OK

ERROR AT+FCT? Response(s) +FCT: <value>

OK AT+FCT=? Response(s) +FCT: (list of supported <value>s)

OK

Parameter(s)

<value> Hexadecimal

1E 30 seconds, not configurable.

M7-21-0010-107 - 232 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.37 +FHS : Call termination status

This read-only parameter indicates the cause of a hang up. Parameter shows the valid values for this parameter as well as the meaning of each value. +FHS is set by the DCE at the conclusion of a fax session. The DCE shall reset this parameter to 0 at the beginning of Phase A.

Syntax

AT+FHS? Response(s) +FHS: <hsc>

OK

For parameters details, please refer to +FHS message.

M7-21-0010-107 - 233 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.38 +FMS: Minimum phase c speed

This optional parameter limits the lowest negotiable speed for a session. This parameter is useful for limiting the cost of a transmission, by requiring a minimum transmission speed. If the facsimile DCE cannot negotiate to a minimum speed, it shall perform an sequential disconnection.

Syntax

AT+FMS= Response(s) OK

ERROR AT+FMS? Response(s) +FMS: 

OK AT+FMS=? Response(s) +FMS: (list of supported s)

OK

For parameter details, please refer to +FCS message.

M7-21-0010-107 - 234 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.39 +FIT: Inactivity timeout

A service Class 2 facsimile DCE shall provide an inactivity timer that allows the DCE to break away from an unsuccessful connection attempt at any stage of a facsimile transfer. The inactivity timer only works while the DCE is off-hook. The <time> parameter indicates the inactivity timeout in seconds. The required timeout is from 1 to 255 seconds. The value of 0 indicates that timeout is disabled. The <action> parameter has two meanings. The inactivity timer starts when the DCE has taken some action that requires DTE response. If the DTE does respond, the DCE shall reset the inactivity timer.

Syntax

AT+FIT=<time>,<action> Response(s) OK

ERROR AT+FIT? Response(s) +FRQ:<time>,<action>

OK AT+FIT=? Response(s) +FRQ: (list of supported <time>s), (list of supported <action>s)

OK

Parameter(s)

<time> Inactivity timeout Numeric

0 Disable

1-255 Enable timeout in seconds.

<action> Numeric

0 Upon timeout, the DCE shall go on-hook, executing an implied ATH command; then reset to +FCLASS=0 if +FCLASS=0 is supported by the DCE

1 Upon timeout, the DCE shall only go on-hook. This feature is used to detect possible system failure, when either no line or DTE activity has occurred for a minimum amount of time

M7-21-0010-107 - 235 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.40 +FBS: Report buffer size

This parameter allows the DCE to report the size of the DCE’s data buffers. The values shall be in hexadecimal and represent the buffer size in octets. The DCE shall provide sufficient receive buffer to accommodate 3 seconds of flow-control-off at the maximum receive speed; at 9600 bit/s, this is E10h octets (3600 decimal).

Syntax

AT+FBS? Response(s) +FBS: <tbs>,<rbs>

OK

Parameter(s)

<tbs> Transmit buffer size. Hexadecimal

<rbs> Receive buffer size. Hexadecimal

M7-21-0010-107 - 236 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.41 +FBO: Data bit order

This parameter controls the mapping between PSTN facsimile data and the DTE-DCE link. There are two choices: -Direct – The first bit transferred of each octet on the DTE-DCE link is the first bit transferred on the GSTN data carrier. -Reversed – The last bit transferred of each octet on the DTE-DCE link is the first bit transferred on the GSTN data carrier. There are two data types to control: -Phase C data – T.4 or T.6 encoded data, or any other type of data (e.g. T.434 BFT), transferred during execution of +FDT or +FDR commands. -Phase B/D data – T.30 Phase B and Phase D control messages that are reported to the DTE in +FHT: and +FHR: reports only (8.6) as well as enabled by the +FBU parameter (8.5.1.10/T.32).

Syntax

AT+FBO=<value> Response(s) OK

ERROR AT+FBO? Response(s) +FBO:<value>

OK AT+FBO=? Response(s) +FBO: (list of supported <value>s)

OK

Parameter(s)

<value> Numeric

0 Selects direct bit order for both Phase C data and for Phase B/D data.

1 Selects reversed bit order for Phase C data and selects direct bit order for Phase B/D data.

2 Selects direct bit order for Phase C data and selects reversed bit order for Phase B/D data.

3 Selects reversed bit order for both Phase C data and for Phase B/D data.

M7-21-0010-107 - 237 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.42 +FEA: Phase C received EOL alignment

This parameter enables optional octet-alignment of EOL markers in received T.4 data streams. It does not apply to T.6 data, or to any other form of data (e.g. T.434 BFT).

Syntax

AT+FEA=<value> Response(s) OK

ERROR AT+FEA? Response(s) +FEA:<value>

OK AT+FEA=? Response(s) +FEA: (list of supported <value>s)

OK

Parameter(s)

<value> Numeric

0 Determines that T.4 EOL patterns are bit aligned (as received).

M7-21-0010-107 - 238 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.43 +FFC: Image data format conversion

This compound parameter determines “the DCE response to mismatches” between the Phase C data delivered after the +FDT command and the data format parameters negotiated for the facsimile session. [See +FCS: response (8.4.2.1/T.32) and +FCS parameter (8.5.1.3/T.32).] For mismatch checking, the DCE depends on the DTE to indicate the data format with embedded <DLE><format> character pairs. If these format indicators are not provided, the DCE shall assume that the format is as negotiated for that session. For each subparameter, value 0 determines that mismatch checking is disabled, and all format codes of this type are ignored. Value 1 determines that mismatch checking is enabled, with session termination if the format codes do not match the negotiated format reported in +FCS: responses. Other values enable degrees of format conversion. Unspecified values are reserved.

Syntax

AT+FFC=<vrc>, <dfc>, <lnc>, <wdc> Response(s) OK

ERROR AT+FFC? Response(s) +FFC: <vrc>, <dfc>, <lnc>, <wdc>

OK AT+FFC=? Response(s) +FFC: (list of supported <vrc>s),(list of supported <dfc>s),(list of

supported <lnc>s),(list of supported <wdc>s) OK

Parameter(s)

<vrc> Vertical resolution format codes Numeric

0 Ignored

<dfc> Data format format codes Numeric

0 Ignored

<lnc> Page length format codes Numeric

0 Ignored

<wdc> Page width format codes Numeric

0 Ignored

M7-21-0010-107 - 239 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


8.44 +FLO: Flow control

This command controls the mode of DTE-DCE flow control.

Syntax

AT+FLO=<value> Response(s) OK

ERROR AT+FLO? Response(s) +FLO: <value>

OK AT+FLO =? Response(s) +FLO: (list of supported <value>s)

OK

Parameter(s)

<value> DTE-DCE flow control Numeric

0 Turn off flow control

1 DC1/DC3 flow control (software flow control)

2 Circuit 106/133 flow control (hardware flow control)

M7-21-0010-107 - 240 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


9 GPRS Related Commands

9.1 +CGDCONT: Define PDP context

The set command specifies PDP context parameter values for a PDP context identified by the (local) context identification parameter, <cid>. The number of PDP contexts that may be in a defined state at the same time is given by the range returned by the test command. A special form of the set command, +CGDCONT= <cid> causes the values for context number <cid> to become undefined. The read command returns the current settings for each defined context. The test command returns values supported as a compound value. If the MT supports several PDP types, <PDP_type>, the parameter value ranges for each <PDP_type> are returned on a separate line.

Syntax AT+CGDCONT=[<cid>[,<PDP_type>[,<APN>[,<PDP_addr>[,<d_comp>[,<h_comp>]]]]]] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CGDCONT? Response(s) [+CGDCONT: <cid>,<PDP_type>,<APN>,<PDP_addr>,<d_comp>,

<h_comp>] [+CGDCONT: <cid>,<PDP_type>,<APN>,<PDP_addr>,<d_comp>, <h_comp>] OK

AT+CGDCONT=? Response(s) +CGDCONT: (range of supported<cid>s),<PDP_type>,,,(list of

supported <d_comp>s),(list of supported <h_comp>s) OK

Parameter(s) <cid> (PDP Context Identifier)

A parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition. The parameter is local to the TE-MT interface and is used in other PDP context-related commands. The range of permitted values (minimum value = 1) is returned by the test form of the command.

Numeric

1-2 <PDP_type> Packet Data Protocol type String

M7-21-0010-107 - 241 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


“IP” Internet Protocol (IETF STD 5) <APN> (Access Point Name)

A parameter which is a logical name that is used to select the GGSN or the external packet data network. If the value is null or omitted, then the subscription value will be requested.

String

<PDP_address> A parameter that identifies the MT in the address space applicable to the PDP. If the value is null or omitted, then a value may be provided by the TE during the PDP startup procedure or, failing that, a dynamic address will be requested. The read form of the command will continue to return the null string even if an address has been allocated during the PDP startup procedure. The allocated address may be read using the +CGPADDR command.

String

<d_comp> A parameter that controls PDP data compression. Numeric 0 Off <h_comp> A parameter that controls PDP header compression. Numeric 0 Off 1 On

Example(s) Define PDP context AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","internet" OK AT+CGDCONT=2,"IP","CMNET" OK AT+CGDCONT? +CGDCONT: 1,"IP","internet","",0,0 +CGDCONT: 2,"IP","CMNET","",0,0 OK

1. Define PDP context 1 2. Define PDP context 2 3. Show all defined PDP contexts.

Un-define PDP context AT+CGDCONT=1 OK AT+CGDCONT=2 OK AT+CGDCONT? OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 242 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


9.2 +CGQREQ: Quality of Service profile

This command allows the TE to specify a Quality of Service Profile that is used when the MT sends an Activate PDP Context Request message to the network. The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the (local) context identification parameter, <cid>. Since this is the same parameter that is used in the +CGDCONT and +CGDSCONT commands, the +CGQREQ command is effectively an extension to these commands. The QoS profile consists of a number of parameters, each of which may be set to a separate value. A special form of the set command, +CGQREQ= <cid> causes the requested profile for context number <cid> to become undefined. The read command returns the current settings for each defined context. The test command returns values supported as a compound value. If the MT supports several PDP types, the parameter value ranges for each PDP type are returned on a separate line.

Syntax AT+CGQREQ=[<cid>[,<precedence>[,<delay>[,<reliability>[,<peak>[,<mean>]]]]]] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CGQREQ? Response(s) [+CGQREQ:

<cid>,<precedence>,<delay>,<reliability>,<peak>,<mean>] [+CGQREQ: <cid>,<precedence>,<delay>,<reliability>,<peak>,<mean>] OK

AT+CGQREQ=? Response(s) +CGQREQ: <PDP_type>,(list of supported <precedence>s),(list of

supported <delay>s),(list of supported <reliability>s),(list of supported <peak>s),(list of supported <mean>s) OK

Parameter(s) <cid> Specifies a particular PDP context definition.

(see the +CGDCONT and +CGDSCONT commands) Numeric

1-2 <precedence> Precedence class Numeric 0 Subscribed by the network 1 High priority

M7-21-0010-107 - 243 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2 Normal priority 3 Low priority <delay> Delay class Numeric 0 Subscribed by the network 1-4 SDU size: 128 octets SDU size: 1024 octets

Mean Transfer Delay

95 percentile Mean Transfer Delay

95 percentile

1 <0.5 <1.5 <2 <7 2 <5 <25 <15 <75 3 <50 <250 <75 <375 4 unspecified

<reliability> Reliability class Numeric 0 Subscribed by the network 1 Non real-time traffic, error-sensitive application that cannot cope with

data loss. 2 Non real-time traffic, error-sensitive application that can cope with

infrequent data loss. 3 Non real-time traffic, error-sensitive application that can cope with

data loss, GMM/SM, and SMS. 4 Real-time traffic, error-sensitive application that can cope with data

loss. 5 Real-time traffic, error non-sensitive application that can cope with

data loss. <peak> Peak throughput class Numeric 0 Subscribed by the network 1 Up to 1000 (8 kbit/s) 2 Up to 2000 (16 kbit/s) 3 Up to 4000 (32 kbit/s) 4 Up to 8000 (64 kbit/s) 5 Up to 16000 (128 kbit/s) 6 Up to 32000 (256 kbit/s) 7 Up to 64000 (512 kbit/s) 8 Up to 128000 (1024 kbit/s) 9 Up to 256000 (2048 kbit/s) < mean > Mean throughput class Numeric 0 Subscribed by the network 1 100 (~0.22 bit/s) 2 200 (~0.44 bit/s) 3 500 (~1.11 bit/s) 4 1000 (~2.2 bit/s) 5 2000 (~4.4 bit/s) 6 5000 (~11.1 bit/s) 7 10000 (~22 bit/s) 8 20000 (~44 bit/s) 9 50000 (~111 bit/s) 10 100000 (~0.22 kbit/s) 11 200000 (~0.44 kbit/s)

M7-21-0010-107 - 244 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


12 500000 (~1.11 kbit/s) 13 1000000 (~2.2 kbit/s) 14 2000000 (~4.4 kbit/s) 15 5000000 (~11.1 kbit/s) 16 10000000 (~22 kbit/s) 17 20000000 (~44 kbit/s) 18 50000000 (~111 kbit/s) 31 Best effort <PDP_type> Packet Data Protocol type String “IP” Internet Protocol (IETF STD 5)

M7-21-0010-107 - 245 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


9.3 +CGQMIN: Quality of Service profile (minimum acceptable)

This command allows the TE to specify a minimum acceptable profile which is checked by the MT against the negotiated profile returned in the Activate PDP Context Accept message. The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the (local) context identification parameter, <cid>. Since this is the same parameter that is used in the +CGDCONT and +CGDSCONT commands, the +CGQMIN command is effectively an extension to these commands. The QoS profile consists of a number of parameters, each of which may be set to a separate value. A special form of the set command, +CGQMIN= <cid> causes the minimum acceptable profile for context number <cid> to become undefined. In this case, no check is made against the negotiated profile. The read command returns the current settings for each defined context. The test command returns values supported as a compound value. If the MT supports several PDP types, the parameter value ranges for each PDP type are returned on a separate line.

Syntax AT+CGQMIN=[<cid>[,<precedence>[,<delay>[,<reliability>[,<peak>[,<mean>]]]]]] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CGQMIN? Response(s) [+CGQMIN:

<cid>,<precedence>,<delay>,<reliability>,<peak>,<mean>] [+CGQMIN: <cid>,<precedence>,<delay>,<reliability>,<peak>,<mean>] OK

AT+CGQMIN=? Response(s) + CGQMIN: <PDP_type>,(list of supported <precedence>s),(list of

supported <delay>s),(list of supported <reliability>s),(list of supported <peak>s),(list of supported <mean>s) OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 246 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13




1-2 <precedence> Precedence class Numeric 0 Subscribed by the network 1 High priority 2 Normal priority 3 Low priority <delay> Delay class Numeric 0 Subscribed by the network 1-4 SDU size: 128 octets SDU size: 1024 octets

Mean Transfer Delay

95 percentile Mean Transfer Delay

95 percentile

1 <0.5 <1.5 <2 <7 2 <5 <25 <15 <75 3 <50 <250 <75 <375 4 unspecified

<reliability> Reliability class Numeric 0 Subscribed by the network 1 Non real-time traffic, error-sensitive application that cannot cope with

data loss. 2 Non real-time traffic, error-sensitive application that can cope with

infrequent data loss. 3 Non real-time traffic, error-sensitive application that can cope with

data loss, GMM/SM, and SMS. 4 Real-time traffic, error-sensitive application that can cope with data

loss. 5 Real-time traffic, error non-sensitive application that can cope with

data loss. <peak> Peak throughput class Numeric 0 Subscribed by the network 1 Up to 1000 (8 kbit/s) 2 Up to 2000 (16 kbit/s) 3 Up to 4000 (32 kbit/s) 4 Up to 8000 (64 kbit/s) 5 Up to 16000 (128 kbit/s) 6 Up to 32000 (256 kbit/s) 7 Up to 64000 (512 kbit/s) 8 Up to 128000 (1024 kbit/s) 9 Up to 256000 (2048 kbit/s) < mean > Mean throughput class Numeric 0 Subscribed by the network 1 100 (~0.22 bit/s) 2 200 (~0.44 bit/s)

M7-21-0010-107 - 247 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


3 500 (~1.11 bit/s) 4 1000 (~2.2 bit/s) 5 2000 (~4.4 bit/s) 6 5000 (~11.1 bit/s) 7 10000 (~22 bit/s) 8 20000 (~44 bit/s) 9 50000 (~111 bit/s) 10 100000 (~0.22 kbit/s) 11 200000 (~0.44 kbit/s) 12 500000 (~1.11 kbit/s) 13 1000000 (~2.2 kbit/s) 14 2000000 (~4.4 kbit/s) 15 5000000 (~11.1 kbit/s) 16 10000000 (~22 kbit/s) 17 20000000 (~44 kbit/s) 18 50000000 (~111 kbit/s) 31 Best effort <PDP_type> Packet Data Protocol type String “IP” Internet Protocol (IETF STD 5)

M7-21-0010-107 - 248 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


9.4 +CGATT: GPRS attach or detach

The execution command is used to attach the MT to, or detach the MT from, the Packet Domain service. After the command has completed, the MT remains in V.25ter command state. If the MT is already in the requested state, the command is ignored and the OK response is returned. If the requested state cannot be achieved, an ERROR or +CME ERROR response is returned. Extended error responses are enabled by the +CMEE command. Any active PDP contexts will be automatically deactivated when the attachment state changes to detached. The read command returns the current Packet Domain service state. The test command is used for requesting information on the supported Packet Domain service states.

Syntax AT+CGATT=[<state>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CGATT? Response(s) +CGATT: <state>

OK AT+CGATT=? Response(s) +CGATT: (list of supported <state>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <state> Indicates the state of GPPS attachment Numeric 0 Detached 1 Attached

M7-21-0010-107 - 249 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


9.5 +CGACT: PDP context activate or deactivate

The execution command is used to activate or deactivate the specified PDP context (s). After the command has completed, the MT remains in V.25ter command state. If any PDP context is already in the requested state, the state for that context remains unchanged. If the requested state for any specified context cannot be achieved, an ERROR or +CME ERROR response is returned. Extended error responses are enabled by the +CMEE command. If the MT is not PS attached when the activation form of the command is executed, the MT first performs a PS attach and then attempts to activate the specified contexts. Once the attach fails, the MT responds with ERROR or with an appropriate failure-to-attach error message if extended error responses are enabled. If no <cid>s are specified the activation form of the command activates all defined contexts. If no <cid>s are specified the deactivation form of the command deactivates all active contexts. An active secondary context can exist if and only if the corresponding active primary context exists. If the primary PDP context associated with a PDP address is deactivated, all the associated secondary contexts are also deactivated and the data transfer for that PDP address is disabled. The read command returns the current activation states for all the defined PDP contexts.

Syntax AT+CGACT=[<state>[,<cid>[,<cid>]]] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CGACT? Response(s) +CGACT: <cid>,<state>

[+CGACT: <cid>,<state>] OK

AT+CGACT=? Response(s) +CGACT: (list of supported <state>s)

OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 250 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


Parameter(s) <state> Indicates the state of PDP context activation Numeric 0 Deactivated 1 Activated <cid> Specifies a particular PDP context definition.


1-2

M7-21-0010-107 - 251 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


9.6 +CGDATA: Enter data state

The execution command causes the MT to perform whatever actions are necessary to establish communication between the TE and the network using one or more GPRS PDP types. This may include performing a GPRS attach and one or more PDP context activations. If the <cid> value is not defined to the MT, the MT will return an ERROR or +CME ERROR response. Otherwise, the MT issues the intermediate result code CONNECT and enters V.25ter online data state. GPRS attachment and PDP context activation procedures may take place prior to or during the PDP startup if they have not already been performed using the +CGATT and +CGACT commands. If context activation takes place during the PDP startup, one or more <cid>s may be specified in order to provide the information needed for the context activation request(s). During each PDP startup procedure the MT may have access to some or all of the following information -

The MT may have a priori knowledge, for example, it may implement only one PDP type.

The TE may provide a PDP type and/or PDP address to the MT during in the PDP startup procedure.

If any of this information is in conflict, the command will fail. Any PDP type and/or PDP address present in the above information shall be compared with the PDP type and/or PDP address in any context definitions specified in the command in the order in which their <cid>s appear. For a context definition to match -

The PDP type must match exactly. The PDP addresses are considered to match if they are identical or if either or

both addresses are unspecified. For example, a PPP NCP request specifying PDP type = IP and no PDP address would cause the MT to search through the specified context definitions for one with PDP type = IP and any PDP address.

The context shall be activated using the matched value for PDP type and a static PDP address if available, together with the other information found in the PDP context definition. If a static PDP address is not available then a dynamic address is requested.

M7-21-0010-107 - 252 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


If no <cid> is provided or if there is no matching context definition, the MT shall attempt to activate the context with whatever information is available to the MT. The other context parameters shall be set to their default values. If the activation is successful, data transfer may proceed. After data transfer is completed, and the layer 2 protocol termination procedure has completed successfully, the V.25ter command state is re-entered and the MT returns the final result code OK. In the event of an erroneous termination or a failure to start up, the V.25ter command state is re-entered and the MT returns the final result code NO CARRIER or, if enabled, +CME ERROR. Attach, activate and other errors may be reported. The test command is used for requesting information on the supported layer 2 protocols.

Syntax AT+CGDATA=[<L2P>[,<cid>[,<cid>]]] Response(s) CONNECT

NO CARRIER +CME ERROR: <err>

AT+CGDATA=? Response(s) +CGDATA: (list of supported <L2P>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <L2P> The layer 2 protocol to be used between the TE and MT String “PPP” Point-to-point protocol <cid> Specifies a particular PDP context definition.


1-2

M7-21-0010-107 - 253 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


9.7 +CGPADDR: Show PDP address

The execution command returns a list of PDP addresses for the specified context identifiers.

Syntax AT+CGPADDR=[<cid>[,<cid>]] Response(s) +CGPADDR: <cid>,<PDP_address>

[+CGPADDR: <cid>,<PDP_address>] OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CGPADDR=? Response(s) +CGPADDR: (list of defined <cid>s)

OK


(see the +CGDCONT and +CGDSCONT commands) If no <cid> is specified, the addresses for all defined contexts are returned.

Numeric

1-2 <PDP_address> A string that identifies the MT in the address space

applicable to the PDP. The address may be static or dynamic. For a static address, it will be the one set by the +CGDCONT and +CGDSCONT commands when the context was defined. For a dynamic address it will be the one assigned during the last PDP context activation that used the context definition referred to by <cid>. <PDP_address> is omitted if none is available.

String

Example(s) AT+CGDCONT=1,"IP","internet" OK AT+CGPADDR=? +CGPADDR: (1) OK AT+CGACT=1 OK AT+CGPADDR=1 +CGPADDR: 1,"010.194.009.097" OK AT+CGDCONT=2,"IP","NET2"

1. Define PDP context 2. List defined <cid> 3. Activate PDP context 4. Show PDP address 5. Define PDP context 2

M7-21-0010-107 - 254 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


OK AT+CGPADDR=? +CGPADDR: (1,2) OK

6. List all defined <cid>s

M7-21-0010-107 - 255 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


9.8 +CGAUTO: Automatic response to a network request for PDP context

activation

The set command disables or enables an automatic positive response (auto-answer) to the receipt of a Request PDP Context Activation message from the network. It also provides control over the use of the V.25ter basic commands 'S0', 'A and 'H' for handling network requests for PDP context activation. The setting does not affect the issuing of the unsolicited result code RING or +CRING. The test command returns the values of <n> supported by the MT as a compound value. When the +CGAUTO=0 command is received, the MT shall not perform a PS detach if it is attached. Subsequently, when the MT announces a network request for PDP context activation by issuing the unsolicited result code RING or +CRING, the TE may manually accept or reject the request by issuing the +CGANS command or may simply ignore the network request. When the +CGAUTO=1 command is received, the MT shall attempt to perform a PS attach if it is not already attached. Failure will result in ERROR or, if enabled, +CME ERROR being returned to the TE. Subsequently, when the MT announces a network request for PDP context activation by issuing the unsolicited result code RING or +CRING to the TE, this is followed by the intermediate result code CONNECT. The MT then enters V.25ter online data state and follows the same procedure as it would after having received a +CGANS=1 with no <L2P> or <cid> values specified.

Syntax AT+CGAUTO=[<n>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CGAUTO? Response(s) +CGAUTO: <n>

OK AT+CGAUTO=? Response(s) +CGAUTO: (list of supported <n>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <n> Numeric 0 Turn off automatic response for Packet Domain only. 1 Turn on automatic response for Packet Domain only.

M7-21-0010-107 - 256 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


2 Modem compatibility mode, Packet Domain only. 3 Modem compatibility mode, Packet Domain and circuit switched calls. For <n> = 0 Packet Domain network requests are manually accepted

or rejected by the +CGANS command. For <n> = 1 Packet Domain network requests are automatically accepted according to the description above. For <n> = 2, automatic acceptance of Packet Domain network requests is controlled by the 'S0' command. Manual control uses the 'A' and 'H' commands, respectively, to accept and reject Packet Domain requests. (+CGANS may also be used.) Incoming circuit switched calls can be neither manually nor automatically answered. For <n> = 3, automatic acceptance of both Packet Domain network requests and incoming circuit switched calls is controlled by the 'S0' command. Manual control uses the 'A' and 'H' commands, respectively, to accept and reject Packet Domain requests. (+CGANS may also be used.) Circuit switched calls are handled as described elsewhere in this specification.

M7-21-0010-107 - 257 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


9.9 +CGANS: Manual response to a network request for PDP context

activation

The execution command requests the MT to respond to a network request for Packet Domain PDP context activation which has been signaled to the TE by the RING or +CRING: unsolicited result code. The <response> parameter allows the TE to accept or reject the request. If <response> is 0, the request is rejected and the MT returns OK to the TE. If <response> is 1, the following procedure is followed by the MT. Commands follows the +CGANS command in the AT command line shall not be processed by the MT. If the <L2P> parameter value is unacceptable to the MT, the MT shall return an ERROR or +CME ERROR response. Otherwise, the MT issues the intermediate result code CONNECT and enters V.25ter online data state. The detailed behavior after the online data state has been entered is dependent on the PDP type. It is described briefly in 3GPP TS 27.060[34], and more detail is provided in 3GPP TS 29.061[39] and the specifications for the relevant PDPs. PDP context activation procedures shall take place prior to or during the PDP startup. One or more <cid>s may be specified in order to provide the values needed for the context activation request. During the PDP startup procedure the MT has the PDP type and the PDP address provided by the network in the Request PDP Context Activation message. The MT may also have some or all of the following information - The MT may have a priori knowledge, for example, it may implement only one PDP type. Maybe the command has provided an <L2P> parameter value already. The TE may provide one or both of PDP type and PDP address to the MT in the PDP startup. If any of this information is in conflict, the command will fail. If one or more <cid> is provided, an attempt shall be made to identify an appropriate context definition by matching the PDP type and PDP address in the network request

M7-21-0010-107 - 258 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


with the PDP type and PDP address in each of the specified context definitions (in the order in which their <cid>s appear in the command) as follows - The PDP type must match exactly. The PDP addresses are considered for matching if they are identical or if the address in the context definition is unspecified. The context shall be activated using the values for PDP type and PDP address provided by the network, together with the other information found in the PDP context definition. An APN may or may not be required, depending on the application. If no <cid> is provided or if there is no matching context definition, the MT will attempt to activate the context using the values for PDP type and PDP address provided by the network, together with any other relevant information known to the MT. The other context parameters will be set to their default values. If the activation is successful, data transfer may proceed. After data transfer is completed, and the layer 2 protocol termination procedure has completed successfully, the V.25ter command state is re-entered and the MT returns the final result code OK. In the event of an erroneous termination or a failure to startup, the V.25ter command state is re-entered and the MT returns the final result code NO CARRIER or, if enabled, +CME ERROR. Attach, activate and other errors may be reported. It is also an error to issue the +CGANS command when there is no outstanding network request. NOTE: This is not the same as if the MT issues a +CGDATA (or +CGACT) command after receiving a +CRING unsolicited result code. A +CGDATA (or +CGACT) does not command the MT to acknowledge the network request but rather to make a new request for context activation. The network request would be ignored. The test command returns the values of <response> and <L2P> supported by the MT as compound values. This command may be used in both normal and modem compatibility modes.

Syntax AT+CGANS=[<response>[,<L2P>[,<cid>]]] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CGANS=?

M7-21-0010-107 - 259 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


Response(s) +CGANS: (list of supported <response>s),(list of supported <L2P>s) OK

Parameter(s) <response> Specifies how the request should be responded to. Numeric 0 Reject the request. 1 Accept and request that the PDP context be activated. <L2P> Indicates the layer 2 protocol to be used (see

+CGDATA command). String

“PPP” Point-to-point protocol <cid> Specifies a particular PDP context definition.

M7-21-0010-107 - 260 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


9.10 + CGCLASS: GPRS mobile station class

The set command is used to set the MT for operating base on the specified GPRS mobile class. If the requested class is not supported, an ERROR or +CME ERROR response is returned. Extended error responses are enabled by the +CMEE command. The read command returns the current GPRS mobile class. The test command is used for requesting information on the supported GPRS mobile classes.

Syntax AT+CGCLASS= [<class>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CGCLASS? Response(s) +CGCLASS: <class>

OK AT+CGCLASS=? Response(s) +CGCLASS: (list of supported <class>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <class> The GPRS mobile class.

If the MT is GPRS attached when the set command is issued with a <class> = CC specified, a detach request shall be sent to the network.

String

“B” class B “CG” class C in GPRS only mode “CC” class C in circuit switched only mode

M7-21-0010-107 - 261 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


9.11 + CGEREP: GPRS event reporting

Set command enables or disables to send unsolicited result codes, +CGEV: XXX, from MT to TE in the case of certain events occurring in the Packet Domain MT or the network. <mode> controls the processing of unsolicited result codes specified within this command. <bfr> controls the effect on buffered codes when <mode> 1 or 2 is entered. If a setting is not supported by the MT, ERROR or +CME ERROR: is returned. Read command returns the current mode and buffer settings. Test command returns the modes and buffer settings supported by the MT as compound values.

Syntax AT+CGEREP=[<mode>[,<bfr>]] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CGEREP? Response(s) +CGEREP: <mode>,<bfr>

OK AT+CGEREP=? Response(s) +CGEREP: (list of supported <mode>s),(list of supported <bfr>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <mode> Numeric 0 Buffer unsolicited result codes in the MT; if MT result code buffer is full,

the oldest ones can be discarded. No codes are forwarded to the TE. 1 Discard unsolicited result codes when MT-TE link is reserved (e.g. in

on-line data mode); otherwise forward them directly to the TE. 2 Buffer unsolicited result codes in the MT when MT-TE link is reserved

(e.g. in on-line data mode) and flush them to the TE when MT-TE link becomes available; otherwise forward them directly to the TE

<bfr> Numeric 0 MT buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is

cleared when <mode> 1 or 2 is entered. 1 MT buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is

flushed to the TE when <mode> 1 or 2 is entered (OK response shall be given before flushing the codes).

M7-21-0010-107 - 262 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


Defined Events (URCs) +CGEV: REJECT <PDP_type>,<PDP_addr> A network request for PDP context activation occurred when the MT was unable to report it to the TE with a +CRING unsolicited result code and was automatically rejected. +CGEV: NW REACT <PDP_type>,<PDP_addr>,[<cid>] The network has requested a context reactivation. The <cid> that was used to reactivate the context is provided if known to the MT. +CGEV: NW DEACT <PDP_type>,<PDP_addr>,[<cid>] The network has forced a context deactivation. The <cid> that was used to activate the context is provided if known to the MT. +CGEV: ME DEACT <PDP_type>,<PDP_addr>,[<cid>] The mobile equipment has forced a context deactivation. The <cid> that was used to activate the context is provided if known to the MT. +CGEV: NW DETACH The network has forced a PS detach. This implies that all active contexts have been deactivated. These are not reported separately. +CGEV: ME DETACH The mobile equipment has forced a PS detach. This implies that all active contexts have been deactivated. These are not reported separately. +CGEV: NW CLASS <class> The network has forced a change of MS class. The highest available class is reported (see +CGCLASS). +CGEV: ME CLASS <class> The mobile equipment has forced a change of MS class. The highest available class is reported (see +CGCLASS).

M7-21-0010-107 - 263 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


9.12 + CGREG: GPRS network registration status

The set command controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code +CGREG: <stat> when <n>=1 and there is a change in the MT's GPRS network registration status, or controls code +CGREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>] when <n>=2 and there is a change of the network cell. NOTE: If the GPRS MT also supports circuit mode services, the +CREG command and +CREG: result code will apply to the registration status and location information for those services. The read command returns the status of result code presentation and an integer <stat> which shows whether the network has currently indicated the registration of the MT. Location information elements <lac> and <ci> are returned only when <n>=2 and MT is registered in the network.

Syntax AT+CGREG=[<n>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CGREG? Response(s) +CGREG: <n>,<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]

OK AT+CGREG=? Response(s) +CGREG: (list of supported <n>s)

OK Unsolicited Result Codes When <n>=1 and there is a change in the MT's GPRS network registration

status. +CGREG: <stat>

When <n>=2 and there is a change of the network cell.

+CGREG: <stat>,<lac>,<ci>

Parameter(s) <n> Numeric 0 Disable network registration unsolicited result code. 1 Enable network registration unsolicited result code.

+CGREG: <stat> 2 Enable network registration and location information unsolicited result

code. +CGREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]

<stat> Numeric 0 Not registered, ME is not currently searching an operator to register to.

M7-21-0010-107 - 264 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


ME is in GMM state GMM-NULL or GMM-DEREGISTERED-INITIATED. GPRS service is disabled, the ME is allowed to attach to GPRS if requested by the user.

1 Registered, home network. The ME is in GMM state GMM-REGISTERED or GMM-ROUTING-AREA-UPDATING-INITIATED INITIATED on the home PLMN

2 Not registered, but ME is currently trying to attach or searching an operator to register to. The ME is in GMM state GMM-DEREGISTERED or GMM-REGIS-TERED-INITIATED. The GPRS service is enabled, but an allowable PLMN is currently not available. The ME will start a GPRS attach as soon as an allow-able PLMN is available.

3 Registration denied. The ME is in GMM state GMM-NULL. The GPRS service is disabled. The ME is not allowed to attach to GPRS if requested by the user.

4 Unknown 5 Registered, roaming. The ME is in GMM state GMM-REGISTERED or

GMM-ROUTING-AREA-UPDATING-INITIATED on a visited PLMN. <lac> Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format String <ci> Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format String

M7-21-0010-107 - 265 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


9.13 + CGSMS: Select service for MO SMS messages

The set command is used to specify the service or service preference that the MT will use to send MO SMS messages. The read command returns the currently selected service or service preference. The test command is used for requesting information on the currently available services and service preferences.

Syntax AT+CGSMS=[<service>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT+CGSMS? Response(s) +CGSMS: <service>

OK AT+CGSMS=? Response(s) +CGSMS: (list of currently available <service>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <service> Indicates the service or service preference to be used. Numeric 0 Packet Domain 1 Circuit switched 2 Packet Domain preferred (use circuit switched if GPRS not available) 3 circuit switched preferred (use Packet Domain if circuit switched not

available)

M7-21-0010-107 - 266 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


9.14 D: Request GPRS service

This command causes the MT to perform any action that is necessary to establish communication between the TE and external PDN. The V.25ter’D’(Dial) command causes the MT to enter the V.25ter online data state and, with the TE, to start the specified layer2 protocol. The MT shall return CONNECT to confirm acceptance of the command prior to enter the V.25ter online data state. No further commands may follow on the AT command line. The detailed behavior after the online data state has been entered is dependent on the PDP type. It is described briefly in clauses 8 (for X.25) and 9 (for IP) of GSM 07.06. GPRS attachment and PDP context activation procedures may take place prior to or during the PDP startup if they have not already been performed using the +CGATT and +CGACT commands. When the layer 2 protocol has terminated, either as a result of sequentially shut down of the PDP or an error, the MT shall enter V.25ter command state and return the NO CARRIER final result code. If <called_address> is supported and provided, the MT shall automatically set up a virtual call to the specified address after the PDP context has been activated. If <L2P> and <cid> are supported, their usage shall be the same as in the +CGDATA command. Commands such as +CGDCONT, +CGQREQ, etc. may then be used in the modem initialization AT command string to set values for PDP type, APN, QoS etc. If <L2P> is not supported or is supported but omitted, the MT shall use a layer 2 protocol appropriate to the PDP type. If <cid> is not supported or is supported but omitted, the MT shall attempt to activate the context using: any information provided by the TE during the PDP startup procedure, e.g. the TE may provide a PDP type and/or PDP address to the MT, or (b) a prior knowledge, e.g. the MT may implement only one PDP type, or (c) using the ‘Empty PDP type’ (GSM 04.08). (No PDP address or APN shall be sent in this case and only one PDP context subscription record shall be present in the HLR for this subscriber.) This command may be used in both normal and modem compatibility modes.

M7-21-0010-107 - 267 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


Syntax ATD*<GPRS_SC>[*[<called_address>][*[<L2P>][*[<cid>]]]]# Response(s) CONNECT

NO CARRIER

Parameter(s) <GPRS_SC> (GPRS Service Code) a digit string which identifies a

request to use the GPRS Numeric

99 GPRS modem service <called_address> A string that identifies the called party in the address

space applicable to the PDP. For communications software that does not support arbitrary characters in the dial string, a numeric equivalent may be used. Also, the character comma’,’. May be used as a substitute for the character period’.’. [<host>][@[<port>][@[<protocol>]]] where <host>, <port> and <protocol> are defined in the +CGDCONT description. For communications software that does not support arbitrary characters in the dial string, a numeric equivalent may be used. However, this should be avoided if at all possible.

String

<L2P> A string which indicates the layer 2 protocol to be

used. For communications software that does not support arbitrary characters in the dial string, a numeric equivalent shall be used: 0 NULL 1 PPP 2 PAD 3 X25 9yyyy M-xxxx

String

“PPP” Point-to-point protocol <cid> Specifies a particular PDP context definition.


1-2

M7-21-0010-107 - 268 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


9.15 S0: Automatic response to a network request for PDP context activation

The V.25ter ‘S0=n’ (Automatic answer) command may be used to turn off (n=0) and on (n>0) the automatic response to a network request for a PDP context activation. When the ‘S0=n’ (n>0) command is received, the MT shall attempt to perform a GPRS attach if it is not already attached. Failure will result in ERROR being returned to the TE. Subsequently, the MT will announce that a network request for PDP context activation by issuing the URC RING or CRING to the TE, follow by the intermediate result code CONNECT. The MT then enters V.25ter online data state and follows the same procedure as it would after having received a +CGANS=1 with no <L2P> or <cid> values specified.


ERROR ATS0? Response(s) <n>

OK

Parameter(s) <n> Numeric 000 Disables automatic answer mode. 001-255 Enables automatic answer mode.

M7-21-0010-107 - 269 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


9.16 A: Manual acceptance of a network request

The V.25ter ‘A’ (Answer) command may be used to accept a network request for a PDP context activation announced by the unsolicited result code RING. The MT responds with CONNECT, enters V.25ter online data state and follows the same procedure as it would after having received a +CGANS=1 with no <cid> values specified. It is an error to issue the ‘A’ command when there is no outstanding network request.

Syntax ATA Response(s) CONNECT

ERROR

Example(s) Accept a network request RING ATA CONNECT

M7-21-0010-107 - 270 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


9.17 H: Manual rejection of a network request for PDP context activation

The V.25ter ‘H’ or ‘H0’ (On-hook) command may be used to reject a network request for PDP context activation announced by the unsolicited result code RING. The MT responds with OK. It is an error to issue the ‘H’ command when there is no outstanding network request.

Syntax ATH Response(s) OK

M7-21-0010-107 - 271 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


9.18 %CGAATT: GPRS automatic attach mode

This command is used to chose the behavior of the attach procedure.

Syntax AT%CGAATT=<att_m>,<det_m> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT%CGAATT? Response(s) %CGAATT: <att_m>,<det_m>

OK AT%CGAATT=? Response(s) %CGAATT(list of supported <att_m>s), (list of supported <det_m>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <att_m> Automatic attach mode Numeric 0 Automatic attach 1 Manuel attach <det_m> Automatic detach mode Numeric 0 Automatic detach after last context deactivation 1 Manuel detach

M7-21-0010-107 - 272 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


9.19 %CGPPP: PPP authentication protocol

This command is used to set the PPP authentication protocol in case of GPRS.

Syntax AT%CGPPP=<protocol> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT%CGPPP? Response(s) %CGAATT: <protocol>

OK AT%CGPPP=? Response(s) %CGPPP:(list of supported <protocol>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <protocol> Authentication protocol Numeric 0 No authentication 1 Password authentication protocol 2 Challenge handshake authentication protocol. 3 Automatic authentication.

M7-21-0010-107 - 273 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


9.20 %PPP: Prepare Circuit-Switched Data call

This command is used to prepare a circuit-switched data call, set up authentication data for PPP, and to query IP-related information after PPP connection setup.

Syntax AT%PPP=<authprot>,<user>,<password>,[<conn_type>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT%CGPPP? Response(s) %PPP: <own_ipaddr>,<dns1_ipaddr>,<dns2_ipaddr>

OK AT%CGPPP=? Response(s) %CGPPP:(list of supported <authprot>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <authprot> Authentication protocol to use with PPP. Numeric 0 No authentication 1 PAP 2 CHAP 3 Automatic authentication. <user> User login name String <password> User password String <conn_type> Connection type Numeric 0 Don’t use PPP 1 Use PPP <own_ipaddr> IP address of the mobile as negotiated with the

network. Numeric

<dns1_ipaddr> <dns2_ipaddr>

IP address of the first and second DNS server to use. Numeric

M7-21-0010-107 - 274 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


9.21 %CGREG: GPRS network extended registration

status

This command reports extended information about GPRS network registration state. %CGREG behaves exactly as +CGREG does. In addition %CGREG supports additional states as well as an indicator for any activated PDP context.

Syntax AT%CGREG=[<n>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT%CGREG? Response(s) %CGREG: <n>,<stat>,[<lac>],[<ci>],[<state>]

OK AT%CGREG=? Response(s) %CGREG: (list of supported <n>s)

OK Unsolicited Result Codes %CGREG: <stat>,[<lac>],[<ci>],[<state>]

Parameter(s) <n> Numeric 0 Disable network registration unsolicited result code. 1 Enable network registration unsolicited result code.

%CGREG: <stat> 2 Enable network registration and location information unsolicited result

code. %CGREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]

3 Enable network registration, location information and PDP context state. %CGREG: <stat>,[<lac>],[<ci>],<state>

<stat> Numeric 0 Not registered, ME is not currently searching an operator to register to.

ME is in GMM state GMM-NULL or GMM-DEREGISTERED-INITIATED. GPRS service is disabled, the ME is allowed to attach to GPRS if requested by the user.

1 Registered, home network. The ME is in GMM state GMM-REGISTERED or GMM-ROUTING-AREA-UPDATING-INITIATED INITIATED on the home PLMN

2 Not registered, but ME is currently trying to attach or searching an operator to register to. The ME is in GMM state GMM-DEREGISTERED or GMM-REGIS-TERED-INITIATED. The GPRS service is enabled, but an allowable PLMN is currently not available. The ME will start a GPRS attach as soon as an allow-able PLMN is available.

M25A M25 M27

M7-21-0010-107 - 275 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


3 Registration denied. The ME is in GMM state GMM-NULL. The GPRS service is disabled. The ME is not allowed to attach to GPRS if requested by the user.

4 Unknown 5 Registered, roaming. The ME is in GMM state GMM-REGISTERED or

GMM-ROUTING-AREA-UPDATING-INITIATED on a visited PLMN. 6 Limited service (cell might be overloaded) [GPRS suspended] 7 GSM call active [GPRS suspended] 8 No cell available [GPRS suspended] 9 Next attempt to update MS [GPRS suspended] <lac> Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format String <ci> Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format String <state> Indicates the state of PDP context activation Numeric 0 No PDP context activated. 1 One or more PDP contexts activated.

M7-21-0010-107 - 276 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


10 M2M Commands

10.1 $NWACT: M2M activate or deactivate

This command is used to activate or deactivate M2M. When M2M is activated:

GPRS service will be attached The PDP context will be activated

Before executing “$NWACT=1”, setting “+COPS=0” and “+CGATT=1” are recommended. If both of them are executed successfully, we can guarantee the GSM and GPRS network has camped on. GPRS attachment procedure may take place if it has not already been performed using the +CGATT commands.

Syntax AT$NWACT=<state>[,<APN>[,<user>,<password>]] (if activating M2M) AT$NWACT=1,<APN>[,<user>,<password>] (if deactivating M2M) AT$NWACT=0 Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT$NWACT? Response(s) $NWACT: <state>[,<APN>[,<user>,<password>]]

OK AT$NWACT=? Response(s) $NWACT: (list of supported <state>s)

OK Unsolicited Result Codes When network deactivate PDP context:

$NWACT: 0

Parameter(s)

<state> State of M2M activation Numeric 0 Deactivated 1 Activated <APN> (Access Point Name) a logical name that is used to String

M7-21-0010-107 - 277 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


select the GGSN or the external packet data network. <user> User ID String <password> User password String

Example(s)

Activate M2M only with <APN> AT$NWACT=1,"internet" OK AT$NWACT? $NWACT: 1,"internet","","" OK AT$NWACT=0 OK

1. Activate M2M only with <APN> 2. Query 3. Deactivate M2M

Activate M2M with <APN>, <user>, <password> AT$NWACT=1,"internet","user_A","pw" OK AT$NWACT? $NWACT: 1,"internet","user_A","pw" OK

1. Activate M2M with <APN>, <user>, <password>

2. Query

M7-21-0010-107 - 278 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


10.2 $NWSO: Session Open or Close

This command is used to open a session or close a session. Before executing $NWSO, M2M must be activated. ($NWACT:1) When a session is open, $NWDF, $NWDW, $NWDR, $NWCN can be executed on this session. The read command returns the current opened sessions.

Syntax AT$NWSO=<mid>,<state> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT$NWSO? Response(s) $NWSO: <mid>,1

[$NWSO: <mid>,1] … OK

AT$NWSO=? Response(s) $ NWSO: (list of supported <mid>s),(list of supported <state>s)

OK

Parameter(s)

<mid> (M2M session identifier) Specifies a particular M2M session.

Numeric

1-5 Support at most 5 sessions. <state> State of session Numeric 0 Closed 1 Open

Example(s)

Open two sessions AT$NWACT=1,”internet” OK AT$NWSO=1,1 OK AT$NWSO=3,1 OK

1. Activate M2M with APN 2. Open session-1 3. Open session-3

M7-21-0010-107 - 279 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


AT$NWSO? $NWSO: 1,1 $NWSO: 3,1 OK AT$NWSO=1,0 OK AT$NWSO=3,0 OK

4. List all opened sessions 5. Close session-1 6. Close session-3

M7-21-0010-107 - 280 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


10.3 $NWDF: Select M2M data format

This command is used to select format of transmission data. Before executing $NWDF on a session, the session must be opened. ($NWSO: <mid>,1) The read command returns the current data format of all opened sessions.

Syntax AT$NWDF=<mid>,<mode> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> $NWDF? Response(s) $NWDF: <mid>,<mode>

[$NWDF: <mid>,<mode>] … OK

$NWDF=? Response(s) $NWDF: (list of supported <mid>s), (list of supported <mode>s)

OK

Parameter(s)


Numeric

1-5 Support at most 5 sessions. <mode> The format of data.

When hex mode, the one byte is displayed as two characters in hexadecimal format. For example, the byte 0x36 (decimal 54) is displayed as "36" (two characters). In hex mode, only characters '0'..'9', 'A'..F' and 'a'..'f' are valid.

Numeric

0 HEX mode 1 Text mode

M7-21-0010-107 - 281 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


10.4 $NWDW: Write data into the TX-buffer

This command is used to write data into the TX-buffer. Before executing $NWDW on a session, the session must be opened. ($NWSO: <mid>,1) Every session has its own TX-buffer. The size of a TX-buffer is 1470 bytes. The data stored in TX-buffer will not be influenced when executing $NWCN. All data stored in TX-buffer will be cleared when the session is closed. The read command returns the current length of stored data in TX-buffer of all opened sessions.

Syntax AT$NWDW=<mid>,<data_string>,<mode> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT$NWDW? Response(s) $NWDW: <mid>,<data_len>

[$NWDW: <mid>,<data_len>] … OK

Parameter(s)


Numeric

1-5 Support at most 5 sessions. <data_string> A string parameter which is sent to the server.

If $NWDF is text mode: The maximum length of <data_string> is 600. The content of <data_string> must be visible character (ASCII 20~7E), but no semicolon(;) and double quote("). If $NWDF is HEX mode: The maximum length of <data_string> is 600. Only characters '0'..'9', 'A'..F' and 'a'..'f' are valid.

String

<mode> Numeric 0 Clear old data. 1 New data is appended to old data.

M7-21-0010-107 - 282 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


<data_len> The length of stored data in TX-buffer. Numeric 0-1470

Example(s) Write data into the TX-buffer of session-1 (HEX mode) AT$NWDF=1,0 OK AT$NWDW=1,”313233616263”,0 OK AT$NWDW? $NWDW: 1,6 OK

1. Set data format to HEX mode 2. Write 6 bytes data into TX-buffer.

(“123abc”) 3. Query length of stored data in

TX-buffer.

Write data into the TX-buffer of session-2 (text mode) AT$NWDF=2,1 OK AT$NWDW=2,"aaaaabbbbb",0 OK AT$NWDW? $NWDW: 2,10 OK AT$NWTX=2,"cccccdddddeeeee",1 OK AT$NWDW? $NWDW: 2,25 OK

1. Set data format to text mode. 2. Write 10 bytes data into TX-buffer.

3. Query length of stored data in

TX-buffer. 4. Write 15 bytes data into TX-buffer.

(append mode) 5. Query length of stored data in

TX-buffer.

M7-21-0010-107 - 283 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


10.5 $NWDR: Read data from the RX-buffer

This command is used to read data from the RX-buffer. Before executing $NWDR on a session, the session must be opened. ($NWSO: <mid>,1) Every session has its own RX-buffer. The size of a RX-buffer is 1470 bytes. The data stored in RX-buffer will not be influenced when executing $NWCN. All data stored in RX-buffer will be cleared when the session is closed. The read command returns the current length of stored data in RX-buffer of all opened sessions.

Syntax AT$NWDR=<mid>,<data_len> Response(s) $NWDR: <mid>,<data_len>,<remain_len>[,<data_string>]


AT$NWDR? Response(s) $NWDR: <mid>,0,<remain_len>

[$NWDR: <mid>,0,<remain_len>] … OK

Parameter(s)


Numeric

1-5 Support at most 5 sessions. <data_len> The length of received data. Numeric 0-1470 <remain_len> The length of total data in the RX-buffer. Numeric 0-1470 <data_string> A string parameter read from the RX-buffer.

Max length is 1470. String

Example(s) Read data (HEX mode)

M7-21-0010-107 - 284 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


AT$NWDF=1,0 OK $NWRX: 1,10,10 AT$NWDR= 1,10 $NWDR: 1,10,0,”31313131316161616161” OK

(In the beginning, length of stored data in RX-buffer is 0) 1. Set data format to HEX mode 2. Receive 1st data from server (10 bytes)

(the content of new received data: “11111aaaaa”)

3. Request read data (10 bytes)

Read data (text mode) AT$NWDF=1,1 OK $NWRX: 1,15,15 AT$NWDR=1,10 $NWDR: 1,10,5,“aaaaabbbbb” OK $NWRX: 1,25,30 AT$NWDR=1,10 $NWDR: 1,10,20,"ccccc11111" OK AT$NWDR=1,1470 $NWDR: 1,20,0,"22222333334444455555" OK

(In the beginning, length of stored data in RX-buffer is 0) 1. Set data format to text mode 2. Receive 1st data from server (15 bytes)

(the content of new received data: “aaaaabbbbbccccc”)

3. Request read data (10 bytes) 4. Receive 2nd data from server (25 bytes)

(the content of new received data: “1111122222333334444455555”)

5. Request read data (10 bytes) 6. Request read data.

(request 1470 bytes, but only 20 bytes in RX-buffer)

Query remain data length in RX-buffer $NWRX: 1,20,20 AT$NWDR= 1,0 $NWDR: 1,0,17 OK

(In the beginning, length of stored data in RX-buffer is 0) 1. Receive data from server (20 bytes)

(the content of new received data: “12345123451234512345”)

2. Query length of stored data in RX-buffer

of session-1.

M7-21-0010-107 - 285 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


10.6 $NWCN: Connection or disconnection to a server

This command is used to connect or disconnect to a server. Before executing $NWCN on a session, the session must be opened. ($NWSO: <mid>,1) When execute M2M connection:

If server type is TCP server, AT$NWCN will establish a connection to a TCP server.

If server type is UDP server, AT$NWCN just records remote IP & port for preparing to send data to a UDP server.

The read command returns the current connection state of all opened sessions.

Syntax AT$NWCN=<mid>,<state>[,<ipproto>,<ip>,<port>] (if connect to M2M server) AT$NWCN =<mid>,1,<ipproto>,<ip>,<port> (if disconnect to M2M server) AT$NWCN =<mid>,0 Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT$NWCN? Response(s) $NWCN: <mid>,<state>,<ipproto>,<ip>,<port>

[$NWCN: <mid>,<state>,<ipproto>,<ip>,<port>] … OK

AT$NWCN=? Response(s) $NWCN: (list of supported <mid>s),(list of supported <state>s),(list

of supported <ipprroto>s) OK

Unsolicited Result Codes When connection with server becomes unworkable:

(only for TCP connection) $NWCN: <mid>,0

Parameter(s)


Numeric

M7-21-0010-107 - 286 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


1-5 Support at most 5 sessions. <state> State of M2M connection Numeric 0 Disconnection 1 Connection <ipproto> Protocol of M2M connection Numeric 0 TCP connection 1 UDP connection <ip> Ip address of the remote server String <port> Port of the remote server Numeric

Example(s)

Connect to two servers by two sessions. (a TCP server & a UDP server) AT$NWACT=1,”internet” OK AT$NWSO=1,1 OK AT$NWSO=2,1 OK AT$NWCN=1,1,0,”111.222.333.444”,1234 OK AT$NWCN=2,1,1,”111.222.333.555”,5678 OK AT$NWCN? $NWCN: 1,1,0,”111.222.333.444”,1234 $NWCN: 2,1,1,”111.222.333.555”,5678 OK AT$NWCN=1,0 OK AT$NWCN? $NWCN: 1,0 $NWCN: 2,1,1,”111.222.333.555”,5678 OK

1. Activate M2M with APN 2. Open session-1 3. Open session-2 4. Connect to a TCP server on session-

1. 5. Connect to a UDP server virtually on

session-2. (Only keep information of IP & port)

6. List connection information of all

opened sessions. 7. Disconnect to the server

(session-1) 8. List connection information of all

opened sessions.

M7-21-0010-107 - 287 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


10.7 $NWTX: Send data to a server

This command is used to send data to a M2M server. Before executing “$NWTX”, the M2M server must be connected. ($NWCN: <mid>,1) The <tx_mode> can be omitted. In this case, the default of <tx_mode> is 0. The TX-buffer is a memory pool with 1470 bytes.

Syntax AT$NWTX=<mid>,<data_string>[,<tx_mode>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT$NWTX=? Response(s) $NWTX: (list of supported <mid>s),,(list of supported <tx_mode>s)

OK

Parameter(s)


Numeric

1-5 Support at most 5 sessions. <data_string> A string parameter which is sent to the server.

If $NWDF is text mode: The maximum length of <data_string> is 600. The content of <data_string> must be visible character (ASCII 20~7E), but no semicolon(;) and double quote("). If $NWDF is HEX mode: The maximum length of <data_string> is 600. Only characters '0'..'9', 'A'..F' and 'a'..'f' are valid.

String

<tx_mode> Numeric 0 Send <data_string> to the server. 1 Send all stored data in TX-buffer to the server.

In this mode, <data_string> must be omitted.

Example(s)

Send data to a server immediately (HEX mode)

M7-21-0010-107 - 288 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


AT$NWDF=1,0 OK AT$NWTX=1,”313233616263” OK

1. Set data format to HEX mode. 2. Send data to the server.

(server will receive “123abc”) Send data to a server immediately (text mode) AT$NWDF=1,1 OK AT$NWTX=1,"testdata" OK

1. Set data format to text mode. 2. Send data to the server.

(server will receive "testdata") Send large data to a server from TX-buffer (text mode) AT$NWDF=1,1 OK AT$NWDW=1,"111111111122222222223333333333444444444455555555556666666666777777777788888888889999999999000000000011111111112222222222333333333344444444445555555555666666666677777777778888888888999999999900000000001111111111222222222233333333334444444444555555555566666666667777777777888888888899999999990000000000111111111122222222223333333333444444444455555555556666666666777777777788888888889999999999000000000011111111112222222222333333333344444444445555555555666666666677777777778888888888999999999900000000001111111111222222222233333333334444444444555555555566666666667777777777888888888899999999990000000000" OK AT$NWDW=1,"1111111111222222222233333333334444444444555555555566666666667777777777888888888899999999990000000000” OK AT$NWDW? $NWDW: 1,700 OK AT$NWTX=1,,1 OK AT$NWDW? $NWDW: 1,0 OK

1. Set data format to text mode. 2. Write 600 bytes data into TX-buffer. 3. Write 100 bytes data into TX-buffer. 4. Query length of data stored in

TX-buffer. 5. Send all 700 bytes data in TX-buffer

to the server. 6. TX-buffer is clear.

M7-21-0010-107 - 289 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


10.8 $NWRX: Indication of receiving data

This command is an unsolicited result code. It is indicated when the server send data to the module. When RX data is received, it will be stored in the RX-buffer. Every session has its own Rx-buffer. The size of a RX-buffer is 1470 bytes. When new data is received, front part of old data will be discarded if RX-buffer’s free space is not enough.

Syntax Unsolicited Result Codes $NWRX: <mid>,<data_len>,<remain_len>

Parameter(s)


Numeric

1-5 Support at most 5 sessions. <data_len> The length of received data. Numeric 1-1470 <remain_len> The length of total data in the RX-buffer. Numeric 0-1470

M7-21-0010-107 - 290 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


Example(s)

$NWRX: 1,300,300

$NWRX: 1,400,700

$NWRX: 1,500,1200

$NWRX: 1,500,1470

(In the beginning, data in RX-buffer is 0) (buffer size: 1470 bytes)

1. Receive 1st data from server (300 bytes)

New

2. Receive 2nd data from server (400 bytes)

New

3. Receive 3rd data from server (500 bytes)

New

4. Receive 4th data from server (500 bytes)

M7-21-0010-107 - 291 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


11 SIM Application Toolkit Commands

11.1 %SATM: Set SAT command/response format

This command set the format of the %SATR, %SATE and the unsolicited result codes of SAT command set. The default format is the hexadecimal string of the PDU of the proactive command, envelop, and terminal response. The other is the format with numeric response. For more detail, please refer to “STK User Guide”.

Syntax

AT%SATM=<mode> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT%SATM? Response(s) %SATM: <mode>

OK AT%SATM=? Response(s) %SATM: (list of supported<mode>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <mode> Numeric

0 GSM 11.14 PDU mode.

1 Numeric mode.

Example(s)

STK profile download with Numeric format AT+CSCS=“UCS2” OK AT%SATM=1 OK AT%SATC=1, “7FFFFFFF7F0200FB07” OK AT+CFUN=1 OK %SATI: 37,0,2, “4E2D83EF96FB4FE15340” %SATI: 37,1, “0065006D006F006D006574068CA1”,33 %SATI: 37,2, “0065006D006F006D006552A0503C”,33

1. Change the character set into UCS2.

2. Set Numeric mode. 3. Enable SAT status

report and profile download.

4. Active the SIM card. 5. Menu Select indication

with Numeric format.

M7-21-0010-107 - 292 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


11.2 %SATC: Configuration for SIM application toolkit

This command refers to the SIM application toolkit download mechanism, which is used to indicate to the SIM the features that the ME is capable of. The different features that are possible for a proactive SIM card are summarized by a table called a “profile”, refer to GSM 11.14 for more details.

Syntax

AT%SATC=<n>,<satPrfl> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err> AT%SATC? Response(s) %SATC: <mode>,<satPrfl>

OK AT%SATC=? Response(s) %SATC: (list of supported <mode>),(Max number of satPrf)

OK Unsolicited Result Codes (%SATM= 0) A command received from the SIM that is not handled by ME is indicated to

TE by %SATI. %SATI: <satCmd>

The result to an envelope command, which was sent by TE, is indicated using the result

%SATE: <satRsp> In general, commands or responses sent by ME to SIM or commands handled

by ME are indicated to TE using the result %SATN. %SATN: <satNtfy>

With these notifications, TE shall be able to indicate appropriate messages to a user.

If SIM application toolkit tries to set up a call using the Set Up Call feature described in GSM 11.14, and the conditions for the call are checked by ME successfully, the call is indicated to TE using the result %SATA.

%SATA:<rdl> Using the accept command A, ME tries to establish the call, otherwise the hook-on command H rejects the pending SAT call and sends the respective response to SIM.

Unsolicited Result Codes (%SATM= 1) %SATI=<cmdType>, list of parameters for different <cmdType>

Please see the table “Syntax of %SATI (Numeric Format)” for detail.

%SATE: <satRsp>

%SATN: <satNtfy> Please see the table “Syntax of %SATN (Numeric Format)” for detail.

%SATA:<rdl>

M7-21-0010-107 - 293 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13




0 Prohibit the SAT command status report 1 Enable the SAT status report <satPrfl> SIM application toolkit profile. Hexadecimal format,

starting with first byte of the profile. String

<satCmd> SIM application toolkit command. Hexadecimal format. String

<satRsp> SIM application toolkit response. Hexadecimal format. String <satNtfy> Commands or responses sent by ME to SIM or

commands handled by ME starting with first byte of response data or command tag. Hexadecimal format.

String

<rdl> If a pending SIM application toolkit command is alerted to TE using result %SATA:, the value of <rdl> indicates the redial timeout for the call in unit of milliseconds.

Numeric

Syntax of %SATI (Numeric Format)

Generic %SATI syntax: %SATI: <cmdType> , list of parameters for different <cmdType> Different syntax for <cmdType>: %SATI: 5,<cmdDetail>,<numEvents >,<eventList> %SATI: 33,<cmdDetail>,<immRes>,<text> %SATI: 34,<cmdDetail>,<text> %SATI: 35,<cmdDetail>,<respMin>,<respMax>,<text>[,<defaultText>] %SATI: 36,<cmdDetail>,<numOfItems>,<titleText> %SATI: 36,<itemId>,<itemText>,<nextActionId> %SATI: 37,<cmdDetail>,<numOfitems>,<titleText> %SATI: 37,<itemId>,<itemText>,<nextActionId> %SATI: 40,<cmdDetail> ,<idleText>

Parameter(s) %SATI: <cmdType> , list of parameters for different <cmdType> <cmdType> Proactive command type Numeric

5 Event List.

33 Display Text.

34 Get Input Key.

35 Get Input String.

36 Select Item.

37 Setup Menu.

40 Set Idle Text.

%SATI: 5,<cmdDetail>,<numEvents >,<eventList> <cmdDetail> RFU, use 0. Numeric

<numEvents > Number of events in the command. Numeric

<eventList> Numeric

M7-21-0010-107 - 294 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


0 User activity.

5 Idle screen available.

7 Language selection.

%SATI: 33,<cmdDetail>,<immRes>,<text> <cmdDetail> bit 1:

0 = normal priority. 1 = high priority. bits 2-7: RFU bit 8: 0 = clear message after a delay. 1 = wait for user to clear message.

Numeric

<immRes> Immediately Response Numeric

0 The ME shall send TERMINAL RESPONSE (Command performed successfully) at the expiration of the short delay.

1 The ME shall send TERMINAL RESPONSE immediately.

<text> String to be displayed.(use the +CSCS character set) String

%SATI: 34,<cmdDetail>,<text> <cmdDetail> bit 1:

0 = digits (0 9, *, # and +) only 1 = alphabet set; bit 2: 0 = SMS default alphabet 1 = UCS2 alphabet bit 3: 0 = character sets defined by bit 1 and bit 2 are enabled 1 = character sets defined by bit 1 and bit 2 are disabled and the "Yes/No" response is requested bits 4 7: RFU bit 8: 0 = no help information available 1 = help information available

Numeric

<text> Prompt string.(use the +CSCS character set) String

%SATI: 35,<cmdDetail>,<respMin>,<respMax>,<text>,[<defaultText>] <cmdDetail> bit 1:

0 = digits (0 9, *, #, and +) only 1 = alphabet set bit 2: 0 = SMS default alphabet 1 = UCS2 alphabet bit 3: 0 = ME may echo user input on the display

Numeric

M7-21-0010-107 - 295 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


1 = user input shall not be revealed in any way bit 4: 0 = user input to be in unpacked format 1 = user input to be in SMS packed format bits 5 to 7: RFU bit 8: 0 = no help information available 1 = help information available

<respMin> Minimum input length. Numeric

<respMax> Maximum input length. Numeric

<text> Prompt string. (use the +CSCS character set) String

<defaultText> Default input string. (use the +CSCS character set) String

%SATI: 36,<cmdDetail>,<numOfItems>,<titleText> %SATI: 36,<itemId>,<itemText>,<nextActionId> … <cmdDetail> bit 1:

0 = no selection preference 1 = selection using soft key preferred bits 2 to 7: RFU bit 8: 0 = no help information available 1 = help information available

Numeric

<numOfItems> Number of items in the list. Numeric

<titleText> Title of the menu.(use the +CSCS character set) String

<itemId> Identifier of the item. Numeric

<itemText> Title of the menu.(use the +CSCS character set) String

<nextActionId> Next action identifier. If the bit 3 of <nextActionId> is 1, it is the default action.

Numeric

%SATI: 37,<cmdDetail>,<numOfitems>,<titleText> %SATI: 37,<itemId>,<itemText>,<nextActionId> … <cmdDetail> bit 1:

0 = no selection preference 1 = selection using soft key preferred bits 2 to 7: RFU bit 8: 0 = no help information available 1 = help information available

Numeric

<numOfItems> Number of menu item in the list. Numeric

<titleText> Title of the menu.(use the +CSCS character set) String

<itemId> Identifier of the menu item. Numeric

M7-21-0010-107 - 296 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


<itemText> Title of the menu item.(use the +CSCS character set) String

<nextActionId> Next action identifier. Numeric

%SATI: 40,<cmdDetail> ,<idleText> <cmdDetail> RFU, use 0. Numeric

<idleText> Text string for the Idle screen.(use the +CSCS character set)

String

Syntax of %SATN (Numeric Format)

Generic %SATI syntax: %SATN: <cmdType>,<cmdDetail>,list of parameters for different <cmdType> Different syntax for <cmdType>: %SATN: 16,<cmdDetail>,<userInfo >,<setupInfo>,<addr> %SATN: 17|18|19|20,<cmdDetail>,<userInfo>

Parameter(s) %SATN: <cmdType>,<cmdDetail>,list of parameters for different <cmdType> <cmdType> Proactive command type Numeric

16 Setup Call

17 Setup SS

18 Setup USSD

19 Setup SMS

20 Setup DTMF

%SATN: 16,<cmdDetail>,<userInfo >,<setupInfo>,<addr> <cmdDetail> Numeric

0 Set up call, but only if not currently busy on another call.

1 Set up call, but only if not currently busy on another call, with redial.

2 Set up call, putting all other calls (if any) on hold.

3 Set up call, putting all other calls (if any) on hold, with redial.

4 Set up call, disconnecting all other calls (if any).

5 Set up call, disconnecting all other calls (if any), with redial.

<userInfo> User information string. String

<setupInfo> Setup information string. String

<addr> Dialing number string. String %SATN: 17|18|19|20,<cmdDetail>,<userInfo> <cmdDetail> RFU, use 0. Numeric

<userInfo> User information string. String

M7-21-0010-107 - 297 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


Example(s) STK profile download in PDU mode AT+CFUN=0 OK AT%SATC=1, “7FFFFFFF7F0200FB07” OK AT+CFUN=1 OK %SATI: “D03E810301250082028182850B804E2D83EF96FB4FE153408F1001800065006D006F006D006574068CA18F1002800065006D006F006D006552A0503C18022121”

1. Disable the SIM card. 2. Profile download and

enable the SAT command status report.

3. Enable the SIM card. 4. Proactive command

indication.

M7-21-0010-107 - 298 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


11.3 %SATE: Send SAT Envelop command

This command provides the possibility to send a command to the SIM, using the envelope mechanism of SIM application toolkit as described in GSM 11.14. If <satCmd> is present, the contents is converted and sent directly to SIM. The coding of the SIM command is the task of TE, no checking is done by ME. As soon as a response from the SIM is received, the contents are sending to ME using the result %SATE: <satRsp>.

Syntax(%SATM=0) AT%SATE=<satCmd> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Parameter(s)


Syntax(%SATM=1)

AT%SATE=<cmdType>,<status> AT%SATE=<cmdType>,<event>[,<data>] Response(s) OK

Parameter(s)

<cmdType> Numeric

211 Select item from the main menu.

214 Event download.

<status> The selected item identifier when <cmdType> is 211. Numeric

<event> The event identifier when <cmdType> is 214. Numeric

4 User active event.

5 Idle screen event.

7 Language selection event.

<data> Language type when <event> is 7. Numeric

Example(s)

Menu selection

M7-21-0010-107 - 299 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


AT%SATE =“D309820201819001019500” OK %SATI: “D02C81030124008202818285098091D1878D8CC78A0A8F0A018091D1878D8A9E97F38F0A028091D1878D7C218A0A”

1. Select Menu item 1 2. Next menu items.

M7-21-0010-107 - 300 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


11.4 %SATR: Send SAT response

This command provides the possibility to send a response to previous received SAT command. If a SIM application toolkit command was indicated to TE using the result %SATI: <satCmd>, the TE should send an appropriate response using the %SATR command. If <satRsp> is present, the contents is converted and sent directly to SIM. The coding of the SIM response is the task of TE, no checking is done by ME.

Syntax(%SATM=0) AT%SATR=<cmdType>,<status>[,<data>] Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Parameter(s)


Syntax(%SATM=1) AT%SATR=<satCmd> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Parameter(s)

<cmdType> Response command Numeric

5 Event List.

33 Display Text.

34 Get Input Key.

35 Get Input String.

36 Select Item.

37 Setup Menu.

40 Event List.

<status> Numeric

0 Performed successfully.

16 Terminated by user.

17 Backward move by user.

18 No response from user.

19 Help request from user.

32 ME temporary failure.

<data> Item identifier or input key are numeric type which corresponding to the Select Item and the Get Input Key response.

Numeric, String

M7-21-0010-107 - 301 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


String type is for Input string response.(use the +CSCS character set)


Example(s)

Select item from the menu (%SATM=0) %SATI: “D02C81030124008202818285098091D1878D8CC78A0A8F0A018091D1878D8A9E97F38F0A028091D1878D7C218A0A” AT%SATR=“810301240082028281830100900101” OK

1. Selective items 2. Select item 0

STK menu operations (%SATM=1) AT+CFUN=0 OK AT+CSCS=“UCS2” OK AT%SATC=1, “7FFFFFFF7F0200FB07” OK AT%SATM=1 OK AT+CFUN=1 OK %SATI: 37,0,9, “53F07063592754E55927670D52D9” %SATI: 37,1, “96FB8A717C3F50994EFD”,0 %SATI: 37,2, “0063006100740063006863A885A6”,0 %SATI: 37,3, “97F36A025A1B6A02”,0 %SATI: 37,4, “4EA453CB804A5929”,0 %SATI: 37,5, “91D1878D74068CA1”,0 %SATI: 37,6, “8CC78A0A751F6D3B”,0 %SATI: 37,7, “7F50982D7C218A0A767C9001”,0 %SATI: 37,8, “570B969B6F2B904A670D52D9”,0 %SATI: 37,9, “5BA26236670D52D9”,0 AT+COPS=0 OK AT%SATR=37,0 OK AT%SATE=211,2 OK %SATE: “” %SATI: 36,0,2, “0063006100740063006863A885A6”

1. Disable the SIM card. 2. Change the character

set into UCS2. 3. Enable SAT status

report and download the profile string.

4. Set Numeric mode. 5. Active the SIM card. 6. The SAT command: Set

up menu. Menu ID 1-9 7. Register to Network. 8. SAT response to Setup

Menu command. 9. Select the Menu 2 by

envelop command. 10. %SATE response. 11. The SAT response 2

M7-21-0010-107 - 302 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


%SATI: 36,11, “4EBA6C2363A885A6”,0 %SATI: 36,12, “71B195804FC392B7”,0 AT%SATR=36,17 OK AT%SATE=211,3 OK %SATE: “” %SATI: 36,0,2, “97F36A025A1B6A02” %SATI: 36,26, “97F36A029EDE64A5”,0 %SATI: 36,27, “624B6A5F5A1B6A02738B”,0 AT%SATR=36,0,26 OK %SATI:33,129,0,“003800360036884C52D597F36A0253F0FF0C7DDA4E0A9EDE64AD670065B04E2D65876B4C66F253CA6392884C52C16B4CFF0C908480FD642D914D500B4EBA930497F3FF0C50B39001523063075B9A768496FB8A71865F78BC50B390545FC3610F300253EF624B6A5F76F464A5003800360036” AT%SATR=33,0 OK

items in the Menu 2. 12. Backward move by

user. 13. Select the Menu 3 by

envelop command. 14. %SATE response 15. Select items. 16. Select the item 26 17. Display text 18. Response the Display

text.

M7-21-0010-107 - 303 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


11.5 %SATT: Terminate SAT command or session

This command is used to terminate a SIM application toolkit command or session. If <cs> is present, the value is coded and sent to the SIM for terminating the command or session. For example, if a SAT Call Set up was indicated with the result %SATA: 60, and the redialing time is exceeded, TE shall send the cause 'end of redialing reached' to ME.

Syntax

AT%SATT=<cs> Response(s) OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

Parameter(s)

<cs> Numeric

0 User stopped redialing.

1 End of redialing reached.

2 User ends session.

M7-21-0010-107 - 304 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


12 Error Report Commands and Error Code

12.1 +CMEE: Report mobile equipment error

Set command disables or enables the use of result code +CME ERROR: <err> as an indication of an error relating to the functionality of the ME. When enable, ME related errors cause +CME ERROR: <err> final result code instead of the regular ERROR final result code. ERROR is returned normally when error is related to syntax, invalid parameters, or TA functionality.

Syntax AT+CMEE=[<n>] Response(s) OK AT+CMEE? Response(s) +CMEE: <n>

OK AT+CMEE=? (list of supported <n>s)

OK

Parameter(s) <n> Supported audio path Numeric 0 Disable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use ERROR instead. 1 Enable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use numeric <err> values. 2 Enable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use verbose <err> values.

M7-21-0010-107 - 305 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


12.2 +CME ERROR: ME error result code

The operation of +CME ERROR:<err> result code is similar to the regular ERROR result code: if +CME ERROR:<err> is the result code for any of the commands in a command line, none of the following commands in the same command line is executed. (neither ERROR nor OK result code shall be returned as a result of a completed command line execution). The format of <err> can be either numeric or verbose. This is set with command +CMEE.

Syntax +CME ERROR: <err>

Result Code 0 Phone failure

1 No connection to phone 2 Phone-adaptor link reserved 3 Operation not allowed 4 Operation not supported 5 PH-SIM PIN required 6 PH-FSIM PIN required 7 PH-FSIM PUK required 10 SIM not inserted 11 SIM PIN required 12 SIM PUK required 13 SIM failure 14 SIM busy 15 SIM wrong 16 Incorrect password 17 SIM PIN2 required 18 SIM PUK2 required 20 Memory full 21 Invalid index 22 Not found 23 Memory failure 24 Text string too long 25 Invalid characters in text string 26 Dial string too long 27 Invalid characters in dial string 30 No network service 31 Network timeout 32 Network not allowed – emergency calls only 40 Network personalization PIN required

M7-21-0010-107 - 306 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


41 Network personalization PUK required 42 Network subset personalization PIN required 43 Network subset personalization PUK required 44 Service provider personalization PIN required 45 Service provider personalization PUK required 46 Corporate personalization PIN required 47 Corporate personalization PUK required 48 File system initial fail 49 Remove file fail 50 Open file fail 51 Read file fail 52 Write file fail 53 Close file fail 54 Create directory fail 55 Open directory fail 56 Write audio setting fail 57 Read audio setting fail 58 Play audio fail 59 Stop playing audio fail 60 Change factory mode setting is not allowed 61 Check type error 62 Allocate memory fail 100 Unknown 103 Illegal MS 106 Illegal ME 107 GPRS service not allowed 111 PLMN not allowed 112 Location not allowed 113 Roaming not allowed in Location Area 132 GPRS service option not supported 133 Requested service option not subscribed 134 Service option temporarily out of order 148 Unspecified GPRS error 149 PDP authentication error 150 Invalid module class M2M error code 201 parameter not allowed 202 GPRS suspended 203 M2M already activated 204 M2M not activated 205 internal error 206 M2M session is in use 207 No free M2M session 208 M2M session not open 209 other process is running 210 connection already established

M7-21-0010-107 - 307 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


211 connection not established 212 TX-buffer space insufficient 213 No data in TX-buffer 214 data format error in hex mode 215 GPRS busy temporarily 216 address or port is already in use 217 server cannot be reached 218 connection is refused by peer 219 size of the data is too large 220 connection has been reset 221 connection has been abort 222 bearer has been disconnected 223 GPRS not ready 224 GPRS bear not ready 225 a similar operation is in progress 226 GPRS connection is already open 250 MMS initial fail 251 MMS deinitial fail 252 MMS not initial, or is sending MMS, or wait the next provision packet 253 Parameter error 254 No free memory 255 Not initial 256 MMS is sending 257 Network error 258 File error 259 Config error 260 Low res 261 Client req 262 Server error 263 Server resp 264 Security error 265 Created 266 Accepted 267 Partial information 268 No response 269 Bad request 270 Unauthorized 271 Payment Required 272 Forbidden 273 No found 274 Internal error 300 Not supported 301 Not ready 302 Memory warning 303 Memory error

M7-21-0010-107 - 308 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


304 Memory remaining 305 Internal error 306 Invalid parameter 307 Invalid state 308 Send msg fail 309 Image number or size is out to range 310 JPEG OK 311 Encoding fail 312 Out of memory 313 Out of range 314 File create fail 315 Undefined fail 316 File read fail 317 File open fail 318 End of file 319 Not complete 320 Insufficient outbuf 321 Insufficient data 322 Not supported 323 Partial decoded 324 Corrupt 325 Argument error 326 Output buf error 327 Quality is less than 60 328 Quality is more than 85 329 Free buf fail 330 Invalid format 331 Invalid mode 332 Invalid size 333 Data not sufficient 512 Fail to abort 513 ACM reset needed

M7-21-0010-107 - 309 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


12.3 +CMS ERROR: message service failure result code

Final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> indicates an error related to mobile equipment or network. The operation is similar to ERROR result code. None of the following commands in the same command line is executed. Neither ERROR nor OK result code shall be returned. ERROR is returned normally when error is related to syntax or invalid parameters.

Syntax +CMS ERROR: <err>

Result Code 0…127 GSM 04.11, annex E-2 values

1 Unassigned (unallocated) number 8 Operator determined barring 10 Call barred 21 Short message transfer rejected 27 Destination out of service 28 Unidentified subscriber 29 Facility rejected 30 Unknown subscriber 38 Network out of order 41 Temporary failure 42 Congestion 47 Resources unavailable, unspecified 50 Requested facility not subscribed 69 Requested facility not implemented 81 Invalid short message transfer reference value 95 Semantically incorrect message 96 Invalid mandatory information 97 Message type non-existent or not implemented 98 Message not compatible with short message protocol state 99 Information element non-existent or not implemented 111 Protocol error, unspecified 127 Interworking, unspecified 128…255 TP Failure-Cause(TP-FCS) values according to GSM 03.40 128 Telematic interworking not supported 129 Short message Type 0 not supported 130 Cannot replace short message 143 Unspecified TP-PID error 144 Data coding scheme not supported 145 Message class not supported 159 Unspecified TP-DCS error

M7-21-0010-107 - 310 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


160 Command cannot be actioned 161 Command unsupported 175 Unspecified TP command error; either the message type identifier is other

than SMS command, or the service center address is corrupt 176 TPDU not supported 192 SC busy 193 No SC subscription 194 SC system failure 195 Invalid SME address 196 Destination SME barred 197 SM rejected-duplicate SM 198 TP-VPF not supported 199 TP-VP not supported 208 SIM SMS storage full 209 No SMS storage capability in SIM 210 Error in MS 211 Memory capacity exceeded 255 Unspecified error cause 300 ME failure 301 SMS service of ME reserved 302 Operation not allowed 303 Operation not supported 304 Invalid PDU mode parameter 305 Invalid text mode parameter 310 SIM not inserted 311 SIM PIN required 312 PH-SIM PIN required 313 SIM failure 314 SIM busy 315 SIM wrong 316 SIM PUK required 317 SIM PIN2 required 318 SIM PUK2 required 320 Memory failure 321 Invalid memory index 322 Memory full 330 SMSC address unknown 331 No network service 332 Network timeout 340 No +CNMA acknowledgement expected 500 Unknown error …511 Other values within the range from 256 to 511 are reserved 512 Fail to abort 513 ACM reset needed

M7-21-0010-107 - 311 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


12.4 +CEER: Extended error report

Execution command causes the TA to return one or more lines of information text <report>, determined by the ME manufacturer, who should offer the TA users an extended report because of - the failure in the last unsuccessful call setup or in-call modification; - the last call releases;

Syntax AT+CEER Response(s) +CEER: <def>,<orgside>,<orgen>,<value>,<report>


AT+CEER=? Response(s) OK

Parameter(s) <def> Define the type of the error report Numeric 0 Defined by standard 1 Defined by Manufacture <orgside> Cause side Numeric 0 From network 1 From MS <orgen> Entity name for internal reference Numeric <value> Error index Numeric <report> Error description in string format String

M7-21-0010-107 - 312 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


12.5 +CEER extended error result code

Result Report 1 Unassigned number

3 No route to destination 6 Channel unacceptable 8 Operator determined barring 16 Normal call clearing 17 User busy 18 No user responding 19 User alerting, no answer 21 Call rejected 22 Number changed 26 Non selected user clearing 27 Destination out of order 28 Invalid number format 29 Facility rejected 30 Response to status enquiry 31 Normal, unspecified 34 No channel available 38 Network out of order 41 Temporary failure 42 Switching equipment congestion 43 Access information discarded 44 Requested channel unavailable 47 Resources unavailable 49 Quality of service unavailable 50 Requested facility unsubscribed 55 Incoming calls barred within CUG 57 Bearer capability not authorized 58 Bearer capability not available 63 Service not available 65 Bearer service not implemented 68 ACM reached ACM maximum 69 Facility not implemented 70 Only restricted bearer cap. Avail. 79 Service not implemented 81 Invalid TI 87 No member of CUG 88 Incompatible destination 91 Invalid transit network selection 95 Incorrect message 96 Invalid mandatory information 97 Message type not implemented

M7-21-0010-107 - 313 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


98 Message type incompatible 99 Info element not implemented 100 Conditional info element error 101 Message incompatible 102 Recovery on time expiry 111 Protocol error 127 Interworking error 200 Bearer service not available 201 No TI available 202 Timer 303 expiry 203 Establishment failure 210 No error 211 Operation failed 212 Timeout 213 Bearer service not compatible

M7-21-0010-107 - 314 - Version: 1.0.7 – 2008/11/13


12.6 +EXT ERROR: extended error result code

Syntax +EXT ERROR: <err>

Result Code 1 Parameter not allowed

2 Data corrupted 3 Internal error 4 Call table full 5 Service table full 6 Call not found 7 No data-call supported 8 One call on hold 9 Hold call not supported for this type 10 Number not allowed by FDN 11 Number not allowed by BDN 12 Parallel USSD not supported 13 Fax minimum speed condition 14 Conflict with command details 15 Not allowed by ALS-Lock 16 IMEI illegal 100 Other error

read.pudn.comread.pudn.com/downloads192/doc/903321/m33_at... · m7-21-0010-107 - 4 - version: 1.0.7...

Documents